Rivertop Apartments · 2017. 11. 1. · D. Owner's Project Manager: Andrew Murray E. Nequette's...

Nequette Architecture and Design, Inc. 2218 2nd Avenue North Birmingham, Alabama 35203 Specifications for

Rivertop Apartments Issue For Permit

Nashville, TN

Project No. 15063

Date: September 14, 2016

SECTION 26 00 00

COVER - RCR

15063 – Rivertop Apartments 1

DIVISION 26/27/28

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

PREPARED BY

9/14/2016

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 00 0102 - 1 PROJECT INFORMATION

SECTION 00 0102PROJECT INFORMATION

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION

A. Project Name: River Top, located at Nashville, Tennessee.B. Owner's Project Number: 15063.

River Road.Nashville , Tennessee 37209.

C. The Owner, hereinafter referred to as OwnerD. Owner's Project Manager: Andrew MurrayE. Nequette's Project Manager: Travis Burke, AIA

1.02 PROJECT DESCRIPTIONA. Summary Project Description: River top appartments consists of Three-story apartment buildings, of

wood construction, with Fiber Cement and fiber-cement trim siding, and asphalt shingle roofing..B. Contract Scope: Design, construction, demolition, and turnover coordination with owner through

move-in-occupancy.C. Contract Terms: Lump sum (fixed price, stipulated sum), with incentives.

1.03 PROJECT CONSULTANTSA. The Architect, hereinafter referred to as Architect.

1.04 PROCUREMENT TIMETABLEA. Required Substantial Completion Date: Not later than July 31, 2017.B. The Owner reserves the right to change the schedule or terminate the entire procurement process at

any time.1.05 PROCUREMENT DOCUMENTS

A. Availability of Documents: Complete sets of procurement documents may be obtained:1. From Owner at the Project Manager's address listed above.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 00 0110 - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 00 0110TABLE OF CONTENTS

PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS1.01 DIVISION 00 -- PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

A. 00 0101 - Project Title PageB. 00 0102 - Project InformationC. 00 0110 - Table of ContentsD. 00 5000 - Contracting Forms and SupplementsE. 00 5200 - Agreement FormF. 00 6000 - Project FormsG. 00 7100 - Contracting DefinitionsH. 00 7200 - General Conditions

SPECIFICATIONS2.01 DIVISION 01 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. 01 1000 - SummaryB. 01 2000 - Price and Payment ProceduresC. 01 3000 - Administrative RequirementsD. 01 3216 - Construction Progress ScheduleE. 01 3553 - Security ProceduresF. 01 4000 - Quality RequirementsG. 01 4100 - Regulatory RequirementsH. 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and ControlsI. 01 5100 - Temporary UtilitiesJ. 01 5213 - Field Offices and ShedsK. 01 5500 - Vehicular Access and ParkingL. 01 5713 - Temporary Erosion and Sediment ControlM. 01 5721 - Indoor Air Quality ControlsN. 01 5813 - Temporary Project SignageO. 01 6000 - Product RequirementsP. 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout RequirementsQ. 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and DisposalR. 01 7800 - Closeout SubmittalsS. 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training

2.02 DIVISION 02 -- EXISTING CONDITIONS 2.03 DIVISION 03 -- CONCRETE

A. 03 1000 - Concrete Forming and AccessoriesB. 03 2000 - Concrete ReinforcingC. 03 5400 - Cast Underlayment

2.04 DIVISION 04 -- MASONRY A. 04 0511 - Masonry Mortaring and GroutingB. 04 2000 - Unit MasonryC. 04 2001 - Masonry Veneer


D. 04 7200 - Cast Stone Masonry2.05 DIVISION 05 -- METALS

A. 05 5213 - Pipe and Tube Railings2.06 DIVISION 06 -- WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

A. 06 1324 - Heavy Timber FramingB. 06 1500 - Wood DeckingC. 06 2000 - Finish CarpentryD. 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework

2.07 DIVISION 07 -- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION A. 07 1300 - Sheet WaterproofingB. 07 2126 - Blown InsulationC. 07 2500 - Weather BarriersD. 07 3113 - Asphalt ShinglesE. 07 4646 - Fiber Cement SidingF. 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and TrimG. 07 7123 - Manufactured Gutters and DownspoutsH. 07 7200 - Roof AccessoriesI. 07 8400 - FirestoppingJ. 07 9005 - Joint Sealers

2.08 DIVISION 08 -- OPENINGS A. 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and FramesB. 08 1433 - Stile and Rail Wood DoorsC. 08 3100 - Access Doors and PanelsD. 08 5113 - Aluminum WindowsE. 08 5313 - Vinyl WindowsF. 08 7100 - Door HardwareG. 08 8000 - Glazing

2.09 DIVISION 09 -- FINISHES A. 09 2116 - Gypsum Board AssembliesB. 09 6500 - Resilient FlooringC. 09 6800 - CarpetingD. 09 6813 - Tile CarpetingE. 09 9000 - Painting and Coating

2.10 DIVISION 10 -- SPECIALTIES A. 10 4400 - Fire Protection Specialties

2.11 DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT 2.12 DIVISION 12 -- FURNISHINGS

A. 12 3600 - Countertops2.13 DIVISION 13 -- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 2.14 DIVISION 14 -- CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 2.15 DIVISION 21 -- FIRE SUPPRESSION


2.16 DIVISION 22 -- PLUMBING 2.17 DIVISION 23 -- HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) 2.18 DIVISION 26 -- ELECTRICAL

A. 26 5600 - Exterior Lighting2.19 DIVISION 27 -- COMMUNICATIONS

A. 27 1005 - Structured Cabling for Voice and Data - Inside-Plant2.20 DIVISION 28 -- ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 2.21 DIVISION 31 -- EARTHWORK

A. 31 1000 - Site ClearingB. 31 2316.13 - TrenchingC. 31 3116 - Termite Control

2.22 DIVISION 32 -- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 2.23 DIVISION 33 -- UTILITIES

END OF SECTION

travis

Text Box

- SEE DRAWINGS

travis

Text Box

- SEE DRAWINGS

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 00 5000 - 1 CONTRACTING FORMS ANDSUPPLEMENTS

SECTION 00 5000CONTRACTING FORMS AND SUPPLEMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR OBTAINING A VALID LICENSE TO USE ALL COPYRIGHTED

DOCUMENTS SPECIFIED BUT NOT INCLUDED IN THE PROJECT MANUAL.1.02 AGREEMENT AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT

A. See Section 00 5200 - Agreement Form for the Agreement and General Conditions.B. The Agreement and General Conditions are based on AIA A141.

1.03 FORMSA. Use the following forms for the specified purposes unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in the Contract

Documents.B. Bond Forms:C. Clarification and Modification Forms:

1. Construction Change Directive Form: AIA G714.2. Change Order Form: AIA G701.

D. Closeout Forms:1. Acknowledgement of Substantial Completion Form: AIA G704DB.2. Affidavit of Release of Liens Form: AIA G706.3. Acceptance Certificate Form.4. Warranty Form.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AIA A141 - Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Design-Builder; 2014.B. AIA G701 - Change Order; 2001.C. AIA G704DB - Acknowledgement of Substantial Completion of a Design-Build Project; 2004.D. AIA G714 - Construction Change Directive; 2007.E. ConsensusDOCS 410 - Standard Design-Build Agreement and General Conditions Between Owner and

Design-Builder (Cost of the Work Plus a Fee with a GMP); 2011, REV 4/2014.F. ConsensusDOCS 491 - Design-Builder's Application for Payment (Where the Basis of Payment of the

Design-Build Agreement is the Cost of the Work and a GMP Has Been Established); 2007, Revised2011.

G. ConsensusDOCS 496 - Design-Build Change Order (Where the Basis of Payment of the Design-BuildAgreement is a Lump Sum); 2007, Revised 2011.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED

END OF SECTION

travis

Highlight

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 00 5200 - 1 AGREEMENT FORM

SECTION 00 5200AGREEMENT FORM

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 FORM OF AGREEMENT1.02 THE AGREEMENT TO BE EXECUTED IS ATTACHED FOLLOWING THIS PAGE.1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 00 7200 - General Conditions.1.04 MODIFICATIONS TO THE AGREEMENT FORMPART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF AGREEMENT FORM

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 00 6000 - 1 PROJECT FORMS

SECTION 00 6000PROJECT FORMS

INSERT COPIES HEREEND OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 00 7100 - 1 CONTRACTING DEFINITIONS

SECTION 00 7100CONTRACTING DEFINITIONS

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 APPLICABILITY: THESE DEFINITIONS ARE INTEGRAL TO THE AGREEMENT.1.02 DEFINITIONS - DESIGN-BUILD DOCUMENTS

A. Contract Documents: As defined in the Conditions of the Contract and as follows:1. At the time of execution of the Agreement, the Contract Documents consist of the following:

a. The Agreement and Conditions of the Contract, and other documents listed on the Table ofContents under the heading Contracting Requirements.

b. The Conceptual Documents.c. The Proposal and Proposal Exhibits, except for provisions that contradict the requirements of

the Conceptual Documents and that are not specifically accepted by the Owner by means ofwritten Modification prior to execution of the Agreement.

2. From time to time after execution of the Agreement, upon approval by the Owner, the followingtypes of documents will be incorporated into the Contract Documents:a. Drawings and other documents documenting the design.b. Construction drawings and specifications detailing the execution of the design.

B. Project Program: The Owner's requirements for size, arrangement, organization, and location offunctional spaces, description of space functions, identification of fittings, equipment, and furnishings,description of the physical and environmental requirements for each space, together with a descriptionof the image, goals, or "mission" of the project.1. Project Program: Preparation of the project program is the responsibility of the Design-Builder; the

program must include a program narrative, mission statements, information about intendedoccupants, relationships between spaces, area requirements, environmental requirements, andspace finishes and fittings.

C. Proposal: The Proposal Form and Exhibits, which comprise the information prepared by the prospectiveDesign-Builder to show their method of complying with the Conceptual Documents.

1.03 DEFINITIONS - TIME PERIODS AND MILESTONE DATESA. Proposal: The time period during which prospective Proposers prepare their Proposals.

1. Substantiation specified to occur during the Proposal period are intended to accompany theProposal.

B. Preliminary Design: The time period during which the design criteria are finalized and preliminarydrawings and written descriptions are prepared to illustrate the proposed design of the work or a portionof the work to the Owner, as described in the Conditions of the Contract.

C. Design Development: The time period during which the form, arrangement, size, and materials of thework or a portion of the work are determined ______.

D. Construction Documents: The time period during which process working drawings, specifications, andother documents describing the work or a portion of the work are prepared in sufficient detail to allowaccurate and complete construction.

E. Construction: The time period from the beginning of work on the project site until final payment ______.F. Substantial Completion: The date as defined in the Conditions of the Contract. Date of Substantial

Completion is the due date for the following:1. Design-Builder's complete punchlist of items to be completed.2. Owner's complete punchlist of items to be completed.3. Compliance with requirements of governing authorities, for submittals, inspections, and permits.4. Compliance with Owner's requirements for access to areas occupied by the Owner.5. Final cleaning.6. Maintenance manuals.7. Warranties.8. Spare parts and extra materials.

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 00 7100 - 2 CONTRACTING DEFINITIONS

9. Maintenance supplies and tools.10. Project record documents.11. Training of Owner's personnel.

G. Closeout: The time period during which all details of both construction and commissioning arecompleted.1. The Closeout period is the time from Date of Substantial Completion until final payment, both as

defined by the Conditions of the Contract.2. Before and during the Closeout period, the Owner will ascertain whether the completed project

complies with the the Contract Documents.H. Occupancy: The time period during which the project is occupied for its intended purpose.

1. The Occupancy period begins at Date of Substantial Completion, as defined by the Conditions ofthe Contract.

2. Move-in will occur before the end of the Closeout period.3. Owner is responsible for operation and maintenance of the project during the Occupancy period,

unless specifically indicated otherwise for certain items.I. Correction Period: The time period defined by the Conditions of the Contract.


END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 00 7200 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

SECTION 00 7200GENERAL CONDITIONS

FORM OF GENERAL CONDITIONS1.01 THE GENERAL CONDITIONS APPLICABLE TO THIS CONTRACT IS ATTACHED FOLLOWING THIS

PAGE.END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 01 1000 - 1 SUMMARY

SECTION 01 1000SUMMARY

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 PROJECT

A. Project Name: 15063 - Rivertop Apartments.B. Owner's Name: OwnerC. Architect's Name: Nequette.D. The Project consists of the construction of 224 Units of mixed use three story wood frame construction

consisting of multiple buildings and one clubhouse.1.02 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION

A. Contract Type: A single prime contract based on a Stipulated Price as described in Document 00 5200- Agreement Form.

1.03 WORK BY OWNERA. Owner will award a contract for supply of certain matrerials spelled out in the divisional specifications

which will commence on the date of the contract awarded for the constuction of the project..B. Items noted NIC (Not in Contract) will be supplied and installed by Owner before Substantial

Completion. Some items include:1. Movable cabinets.2. Furnishings.3. Rugs.4. Artwork.

1.04 OWNER OCCUPANCYA. Owner intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion.B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations.C. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy.

1.05 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISESA. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. B. Arrange use of site and premises to allow:

1. Owner occupancy.2. Work by Others.3. Work by Owner.

C. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner:1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open during

construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily altered.2. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit.

1.06 WORK SEQUENCEA. Coordinate construction schedule and operations with Owner.

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 01 2000 - 1 PRICE AND PAYMENTPROCEDURES

SECTION 01 2000PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments.B. Documentation of changes in Contract Sum and Contract Time.C. Change procedures.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 00 5000 - Contracting Forms and Supplements: Forms to be used.

1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUESA. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form

specified; submit draft to Architect for approval.B. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted.C. Include separately from each line item, a direct proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit.D. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment.

1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTSA. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement.B. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form

specified; submit sample to LIV Development for approval.C. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted.D. For each item, provide a column for listing each of the following:

1. Item Number.2. Description of work.3. Scheduled Values.4. Previous Applications.5. Work in Place and Stored Materials under this Application.6. Authorized Change Orders.7. Total Completed and Stored to Date of Application.8. Percentage of Completion.9. Balance to Finish.10. Retainage.

E. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer.F. Submit three copies of each Application for Payment.G. Include the following with the application:

1. Partial release of liens from major Subcontractors and vendors.1.05 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

A. For minor changes not involving an adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time, Architect willissue instructions directly to Contractor.

B. For other required changes, Architect and/or LIV Development will issue a document signed by Ownerinstructing Contractor to proceed with the change, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.1. The document will describe the required changes and will designate method of determining any

change in Contract Sum or Contract Time.2. Promptly execute the change.

C. For changes for which advance pricing is desired, Architect and/or Owner will issue a document thatincludes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised drawings andspecifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change with a stipulation of any overtime

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 01 2000 - 2 PRICE AND PAYMENTPROCEDURES

work required and the period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. Contractor shall prepare and submit a fixed price quotation within 5 days.

D. Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to LIV, Architect, describing theproposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change,and the effect on the Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation and a statementdescribing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutionsin accordance with Section 01 6000.

E. Computation of Change in Contract Amount: As specified in the Agreement and Conditions of theContract.1. For change requested by Architect for work falling under a fixed price contract, the amount will be

based on Contractor's price quotation.2. For change requested by Contractor, the amount will be based on the Contractor's request for a

Change Order as approved by Architect and LIV.F. Substantiation of Costs: Provide full information required for evaluation.

1. On request, provide the following data:a. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment.b. Taxes, insurance, and bonds.c. Overhead and profit.d. Justification for any change in Contract Time.e. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented.

2. For Time and Material work, submit itemized account and supporting data after completion ofchange, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract.

G. Execution of Change Orders: Architect and/or LIV will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties asprovided in the Conditions of the Contract.

H. After execution of Change Order, promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Paymentforms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum.

1.06 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENTA. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted

Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due.B. Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished:

1. All closeout procedures specified in Section 01 7000.PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 01 3000 - 1 ADMINISTRATIVEREQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 3000ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS


A. Preconstruction meeting.B. Progress meetings.C. Construction progress schedule.D. Progress photographs.E. Coordination drawings.F. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout.G. Number of copies of submittals.H. Submittal procedures.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Document 00 7200 - General Conditions: Dates for applications for payment.B. Document 00 7200 - General Conditions: Duties of the Construction Manager.C. Document 00 7300 - Supplementary Conditions: Duties of the Construction Manager.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. Attendance Required:1. Owner.2. Architect.3. Contractor.

B. Agenda:1. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement.2. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, and progress schedule.3. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments,

proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures.4. Scheduling.

C. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies toArchitect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.02 PROGRESS MEETINGSA. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum bi-monthly intervals.B. Attendance Required:

1. Contractor.2. Owner.3. Architect.4. Contractor's Superintendent.5. Major Subcontractors.

C. Agenda:1. Review minutes of previous meetings.2. Review of Work progress.3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress.5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.6. Maintenance of progress schedule.


7. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.8. Planned progress during succeeding work period.9. Maintenance of quality and work standards.10. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.11. Other business relating to Work.

D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies toArchitect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULEA. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days.

3.04 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHSA. Submit photographs with each application for payment, taken not more than 3 days prior to submission

of application for payment.B. Photography Type: Digital; electronic files.C. In addition to periodic, recurring views, take photographs of each of the following events:

1. Completion of site clearing.2. Excavations in progress.3. Foundations in progress and upon completion.4. Structural framing in progress and upon completion.5. Enclosure of building, upon completion.

D. Views: 1. Consult with Architect for instructions on views required.2. Provide factual presentation.3. Provide correct exposure and focus, high resolution and sharpness, maximum depth of field, and

minimum distortion.3.05 COORDINATION DRAWINGS3.06 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review:1. Product data.2. Shop drawings.3. Samples for selection.4. Samples for verification.

B. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information givenand the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article

below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals.3.07 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION

A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information:1. Design data.2. Certificates.3. Test reports.4. Inspection reports.5. Manufacturer's instructions.6. Manufacturer's field reports.7. Other types indicated.

B. Submit for Architect's knowledge. No action will be taken.3.08 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. Submit Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion.


B. Submit Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion.C. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout:

1. Project record documents.2. Operation and maintenance data.3. Warranties.4. Bonds.5. Other types as indicated.

D. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion.3.09 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS

A. Documents for Review:1. Small Size Sheets, Not Larger Than 8-1/2 x 11 inches: Submit the number of copies that

Contractor requires, plus one copy that will be retained by Architect.B. Documents for Information: Submit one copy.C. Documents for Project Closeout: Make one reproduction of submittal originally reviewed. Submit one

extra of submittals for information.D. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be retained

by Architect.1. After review, produce duplicates.2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated.

3.10 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURESA. Shop Drawing Procedures:

1. Prepare accurate, drawn-to-scale, original shop drawing documentation by interpreting theContract Documents and coordinating related Work.

2. Generic, non-project specific information submitted as shop drawings do not meet therequirements for shop drawings.

B. Transmit each submittal with a copy of approved submittal form.C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and

specification section number, as appropriate on each copy.D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products

required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordancewith the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.

E. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items.F. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor.G. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be detrimental

to successful performance of the completed Work.H. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps.I. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.J. Distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply

with requirements.END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 01 3216 - 1 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESSSCHEDULE

SECTION 01 3216CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE


A. Preliminary schedule.B. Construction progress schedule, bar chart type.

1.02 SUBMITTALSA. Within 10 days after date of Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining planned operations for the

first 60 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work.B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days.C. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule.D. Submit updated schedule every 14 days.E. Submit the number of opaque reproductions that Contractor requires, plus two copies that will be

retained by Architect.1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Contractor's Administrative Personnel: 5 years minimum experience in using and monitoring CPMschedules on comparable projects.

1.04 SCHEDULE FORMATA. Listings: In chronological order according to the start date for each activity. Identify each activity with

the applicable specification section number.PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE

A. Prepare preliminary schedule in the form of a horizontal bar chart.3.02 BAR CHARTS

A. Include a separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation.B. Identify the first work day of each week.

3.03 REVIEW AND EVALUATION OF SCHEDULEA. Participate in joint review and evaluation of schedule with Architect at each submittal.B. Evaluate project status to determine work behind schedule and work ahead of schedule.C. After review, revise as necessary as result of review, and resubmit within 3 days.

3.04 UPDATING SCHEDULEA. Maintain schedules to record actual start and finish dates of completed activities.B. Indicate progress of each activity to date of revision, with projected completion date of each activity. C. Annotate diagrams to graphically depict current status of Work.D. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in Work, and other identifiable

changes.E. Indicate changes required to maintain Date of Substantial Completion.F. Submit reports required to support recommended changes.

3.05 DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULEA. Distribute copies of updated schedules to Contractor's project site file, to Subcontractors, suppliers,

Architect, Owner, and other concerned parties.

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 01 3216 - 2 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESSSCHEDULE

B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in schedules.END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 01 3553 - 1 SECURITY PROCEDURES

SECTION 01 3553SECURITY PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES1.02 ENTRY CONTROL

A. Restrict entrance of persons and vehicles into Project site and existing facilities.B. Allow entrance only to authorized persons with proper identification.

1.03 GUARD SERVICEA. Employ non-uniformed guard service to provide watch persons at site at LIV Development.


END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 01 4000 - 1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 4000QUALITY REQUIREMENTS


A. Submittals.B. Mock-ups.C. Control of installation.D. Tolerances.E. Testing and inspection agencies and services.F. Control of installation.G. Mock-ups.H. Tolerances.I. Defect Assessment.

1.02 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Testing Agency Qualifications:

1. Prior to start of Work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and names of fulltime registered Engineer and responsible officer.

C. Design Data: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose ofassessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contractdocuments, or for Owner's information.

D. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect, LIVDevelopment, and to Contractor.1. Include:

a. Date issued.b. Project title and number.c. Name of inspector.d. Date and time of sampling or inspection.e. Identification of product and specifications section.f. Location in the Project.g. Type of test/inspection.h. Date of test/inspection.i. Results of test/inspection.j. Conformance with Contract Documents.k. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of results.

1.03 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES AND SERVICESA. Owner will employ services of an independent testing agency to perform certain specified testing;

payment for cost of services will be derived from allowance specified in Section 01 2100; see Section 012100 and applicable sections for description of services included in allowance.

B. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform other specifiedtesting.

C. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance withrequirements of Contract Documents.

PART 3 EXECUTION2.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, andworkmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.


B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect

before proceeding.D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent

tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer.G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses,

vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.2.02 MOCK-UPS

A. Tests shall be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respectiveproduct specification sections.

B. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals,and finishes.

C. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work.D. Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect and is specified in product specification sections to be

removed, protect mock-up throughout construction, remove mock-up and clear area when directed todo so by Architect.

2.03 TOLERANCESA. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not

permit tolerances to accumulate.B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract

Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.

2.04 TESTING AND INSPECTIONA. Testing Agency Duties:

1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance ofservices.

2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards.3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.4. Promptly notify Architect, LIV Development, and Contractor of observed irregularities or

non-conformance of Work or products.5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect.6. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified.

B. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority:1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor.4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work.

C. Contractor Responsibilities:1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used that

require testing, along with proposed mix designs.2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work .3. Provide incidental labor and facilities:

a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected.b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected.c. To facilitate tests/inspections.d. To provide storage and curing of test samples.


4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiringtesting/inspection services.

5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples,tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.

6. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required byContractor beyond specified requirements.

D. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by thesame agency on instructions by Architect and LIV Development.

E. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for byContractor.

2.05 DEFECT ASSESSMENTA. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements.B. If, in the opinion of Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Architect will direct an

appropriate remedy or adjust payment.END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 01 4100 - 1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 4100REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SUMMARY

A. Regulatory requirements applicable to this project are the following:B. 29 CFR 1910 - Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition.C. State of CO amendments to some or all of the following.D. Nashville Building Department Building Code amendments to some or all of the following:E. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; 2015.F. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2015.G. ICC (IPC) - International Plumbing Code; 2012.H. ICC (IMC) - International Mechanical Code; 2012.I. ICC (IFGC) - International Fuel Gas Code; 2012.J. ICC (IEC) - ICC International Electrical Code, 2012.K. ICC (IECC) - International Energy Conservation Code; 2012.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Designer Qualifications: Where delegated engineering design is to be performed under the construction

contract provide the direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this type ofwork and licensed in Tennessee.


END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 01 5000 - 1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES ANDCONTROLS

SECTION 01 5000TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS


A. Temporary telecommunications services.B. Temporary sanitary facilities.C. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing.D. Security requirements.E. Waste removal facilities and services.F. Project identification sign.G. Field offices.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 5100 - Temporary Utilities.B. Section 01 5213 - Field Offices and Sheds.C. Section 01 5500 - Vehicular Access and Parking.D. Section 01 3553 - Security Procedures.E. Section 01 5813 - Temporary Project Signage.

1.03 TEMPORARY UTILITIES - SEE SECTION 01 51001.04 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES

A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to field office at time of project mobilization.B. Telecommunications services shall include:

1. Telephone Land Lines: One line, minimum; one handset per line.2. Internet Connections: Minimum of one; DSL modem or faster.

1.05 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIESA. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization.B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition.

1.06 BARRIERSA. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas that

could be hazardous to workers or the public, to allow for owner's use of site and to protect existingfacilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations .

B. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage.1.07 FENCING

A. Provide 6 foot high fence to secure construction site entrance; equip with vehicular gates with locks.1.08 SECURITY - SEE SECTION 01 3553

A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, and Owner's operations fromunauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft.

1.09 WASTE REMOVALA. See Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal, for additional requirements.B. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly

condition.C. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site periodically.D. If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable

non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unlessotherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction.

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 01 5000 - 2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES ANDCONTROLS

1.10 PROJECT IDENTIFICATIONA. Provide project identification sign of design and construction indicated on Drawings.B. No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by law.

1.11 FIELD OFFICES - SEE SECTION 01 5213A. Office: Weathertight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling equipment, and equipped with

sturdy furniture, drawing rack and drawing display table.B. Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate 6 persons.

1.12 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLSA. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Date of Substantial Completion

inspection.B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated.C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.


END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 01 5100 - 1 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

SECTION 01 5100TEMPORARY UTILITIES


A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, and water.1.02 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY

A. Cost: By Contractor.B. Power Service Characteristics: 120/240 volt, 200 ampere, single phase, three wire, or as determined by

the builder and local electrical inspector.C. Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located at

each floor. Provide flexible power cords as required.D. Provide main service disconnect and over-current protection at convenient location and meter.E. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction.F. Provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide single phase branch circuits for

power and lighting.1.03 TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES

A. Provide and maintain incandescent lighting for construction operations .B. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and

lamps as required.C. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.

1.04 TEMPORARY HEATINGA. Cost of Energy: By Contractor.B. Provide heating devices and heat as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction

operations.C. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress,

unless indicated otherwise in specifications.1.05 TEMPORARY VENTILATION

A. Utilize existing ventilation equipment. Extend and supplement equipment with temporary fan units asrequired to maintain clean air for construction operations.

1.06 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICEA. Cost of Water Used: By Contractor.B. Provide and maintain suitable quality water service for construction operations at time of project

mobilization.PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 01 5213 - 1 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS

SECTION 01 5213FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS


A. Temporary field offices for use of Architect, LIV.B. Temporary field offices for use of Contractor.

1.02 USE OF PERMANENT FACILITIESA. Permanent facilities shall not be used for field offices.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CONSTRUCTION

A. Portable or mobile buildings, or buildings constructed with floors raised above ground, securely fixed tofoundations, with steps and landings at entrance doors.

B. Fire Extinguishers: Appropriate type fire extinguisher at each office.2.02 CONTRACTOR OFFICE AND FACILITIES

A. Size: For Contractor's needs and to provide space for project meetings.B. Telephone: As specified in Section 01 5000.

2.03 OWNER AND ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OFFICEA. Separate desk space for sole use of Owner, and Architect.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PREPARATION

A. Fill and grade sites for temporary structures to provide drainage away from buildings.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install office spaces ready for occupancy 15 days after date fixed in Notice to Proceed.B. Employee Residential Occupancy: Not allowed on Owner's property.

3.03 MAINTENANCE AND CLEANINGA. Weekly janitorial services for offices; periodic cleaning and maintenance for offices.

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 01 5500 - 1 VEHICULAR ACCESS ANDPARKING

SECTION 01 5500VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING


A. Access roads.B. Parking.C. Permanent pavements and parking facilities.D. Construction parking controls.E. Haul routes.F. Maintenance.G. Removal, repair.H. Mud from site vehicles.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. Temporary Construction: Contractor's option.2.02 SIGNS, SIGNALS, AND DEVICES

A. Flag Person Equipment: As required by local jurisdictions.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 ACCESS ROADS

A. Use of designated existing on-site streets and driveways for construction traffic is permitted.B. Tracked vehicles not allowed on paved areas.C. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants free of obstructions.

3.02 PARKINGA. Arrange for temporary parking areas to accommodate use of construction personnel.

3.03 PERMANENT PAVEMENTS AND PARKING FACILITIESA. Prior to Substantial Completion the base for permanent roads and parking areas may be used for

construction traffic.3.04 HAUL ROUTES

A. Consult with authority having jurisdiction, establish public thoroughfares to be used for haul routes andsite access.

B. Confine construction traffic to designated haul routes.C. Provide traffic control at critical areas of haul routes to regulate traffic, to minimize interference with

public traffic.3.05 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain traffic and parking areas in a sound condition free of excavated material, constructionequipment, Products, mud, snow, and ice.

B. Maintain existing paved areas used for construction; promptly repair breaks, potholes, low areas,standing water, and other deficiencies, to maintain paving and drainage in original, or specified,condition.

3.06 REMOVAL, REPAIRA. Repair damage caused by installation.

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 01 5500 - 2 VEHICULAR ACCESS ANDPARKING

3.07 MUD FROM SITE VEHICLESA. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets.

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 01 5713 - 1 TEMPORARY EROSION ANDSEDIMENT CONTROL

SECTION 01 5713TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL


A. Prevention of erosion due to construction activities.B. Prevention of sedimentation of waterways, open drainage ways, and storm and sanitary sewers due to

construction activities.C. Restoration of areas eroded due to insufficient preventive measures.D. Performance bond.E. Compensation of Owner for fines levied by authorities having jurisdiction due to non-compliance by

Contractor.1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Develop and follow an Erosion and Sedimentation Prevention Plan and submit periodic inspectionreports.

B. Do not begin clearing, grading, or other work involving disturbance of ground surface cover untilapplicable permits have been obtained; furnish all documentation required to obtain applicable permits.1. Owner will obtain permits and pay for securities required by authority having jurisdiction.2. Owner will withhold payment to Contractor equivalent to all fines resulting from non-compliance

with applicable regulations.C. Provide to Owner a Performance Bond covering erosion and sedimentation preventive measures only,

in an amount equal to 100 percent of the cost of erosion and sedimentation control work.D. Timing: Put preventive measures in place as soon as possible after disturbance of surface cover and

before precipitation occurs.E. Storm Water Runoff: Control increased storm water runoff due to disturbance of surface cover due to

construction activities for this project.1. Prevent runoff into storm and sanitary sewer systems, including open drainage channels, in excess

of actual capacity or amount allowed by authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is less.2. Anticipate runoff volume due to the most extreme short term and 24-hour rainfall events that might

occur in 25 years.F. Erosion On Site: Minimize wind, water, and vehicular erosion of soil on project site due to construction

activities for this project.1. Control movement of sediment and soil from temporary stockpiles of soil.2. Prevent development of ruts due to equipment and vehicular traffic.3. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at no cost

to Owner.G. Erosion Off Site: Prevent erosion of soil and deposition of sediment on other properties caused by

water leaving the project site due to construction activities for this project.1. Prevent windblown soil from leaving the project site.2. Prevent tracking of mud onto public roads outside site.3. Prevent mud and sediment from flowing onto sidewalks and pavements.4. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at no cost

to Owner.H. Sedimentation of Waterways On Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways on the project site, including

rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitary sewers.1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to Owner;

remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.2. If sediment basins are used as temporary preventive measures, pump dry and remove deposited

sediment after each storm.


I. Sedimentation of Waterways Off Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways off the project site, includingrivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitary sewers.1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to Owner;

remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.J. Open Water: Prevent standing water that could become stagnant.K. Maintenance: Maintain temporary preventive measures until permanent measures have been

established.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan:

1. Include:a. Site plan identifying soils and vegetation, existing erosion problems, and areas vulnerable to

erosion due to topography, soils, vegetation, or drainage.b. Site plan showing grading; new improvements; temporary roads, traffic accesses, and other

temporary construction; and proposed preventive measures.c. Where extensive areas of soil will be disturbed, include storm water flow and volume

calculations, soil loss predictions, and proposed preventive measures.d. Schedule of temporary preventive measures, in relation to ground disturbing activities.e. Other information required by law.

2. Obtain the approval of the Plan by authorities having jurisdiction.3. Obtain the approval of the Plan by Owner.

C. Inspection Reports: Submit report of each inspection; identify each preventive measure, indicatecondition, and specify maintenance or repair required and accomplished.

PART 3 EXECUTION2.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine site and identify existing features that contribute to erosion resistance; maintain such existingfeatures to greatest extent possible.

2.02 PREPARATIONA. Schedule work so that soil surfaces are left exposed for the minimum amount of time.

2.03 SCOPE OF PREVENTIVE MEASURESA. In all cases, if permanent erosion resistant measures have been installed temporary preventive

measures are not required.B. Construction Entrances: Traffic-bearing aggregate surface.

1. Width: As required; 20 feet, minimum.2. Length: 50 feet, minimum.3. Provide at each construction entrance from public right-of-way.

C. Linear Sediment Barriers: Made of silt fences.1. Provide linear sediment barriers:

a. Along downhill perimeter edge of disturbed areas, including soil stockpiles.2. Space sediment barriers with the following maximum slope length upslope from barrier:

a. Slope of Less Than 2 Percent: 100 feet..b. Slope Between 2 and 5 Percent: 75 feet.c. Slope Between 5 and 10 Percent: 50 feet.d. Slope Between 10 and 20 Percent: 25 feet.e. Slope Over 20 Percent: 15 feet.

D. Storm Drain Curb Inlet Sediment Trap: Protect each curb inlet using one of the following measures:1. Filter fabric wrapped around hollow concrete blocks blocking entire inlet face area; use one piece

of fabric wrapped at least 1-1/2 times around concrete blocks and secured to prevent dislodging;orient cores of blocks so runoff passes into inlet.


2. Straw bale row blocking entire inlet face area; anchor into pavement.E. Storm Drain Drop Inlet Sediment Traps: As detailed on drawings.F. Temporary Splash Pads: Stone aggregate over filter fabric; size to suit application; provide at

downspout outlets and storm water outlets.G. Soil Stockpiles: Protect using one of the following measures:

1. Cover with polyethylene film, secured by placing soil on outer edges.2. Cover with mulch at least 4 inches thickness of pine needles, sawdust, bark, wood chips, or

shredded leaves, or 6 inches of straw or hay.H. Mulching: Use only for areas that may be subjected to erosion for less than 6 months.I. Temporary Seeding: Use where temporary vegetated cover is required.

2.04 MAINTENANCEA. Inspect preventive measures weekly, within 24 hours after the end of any storm that produces 0.5

inches or more rainfall at the project site, and daily during prolonged rainfall.B. Repair deficiencies immediately.C. Silt Fences:

1. Promptly replace fabric that deteriorates unless need for fence has passed.2. Remove silt deposits that exceed one-third of the height of the fence.3. Repair fences that are undercut by runoff or otherwise damaged, whether by runoff or other

causes.D. Clean out temporary sediment control structures weekly and relocate soil on site.E. Place sediment in appropriate locations on site; do not remove from site.

2.05 CLEAN UPA. Remove temporary measures after permanent measures have been installed, unless permitted to

remain by LIV Development, or Architect.B. Clean out temporary sediment control structures that are to remain as permanent measures.C. Where removal of temporary measures would leave exposed soil, shape surface to an acceptable grade

and finish to match adjacent ground surfaces.END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 01 5721 - 1 INDOOR AIR QUALITYCONTROLS

SECTION 01 5721INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS


A. Construction procedures to promote adequate indoor air quality after construction.B. Building flush-out after construction and before occupancy.C. Testing indoor air quality after completion of construction.D. Testing air change effectiveness after completion of construction.

1.02 PROJECT GOALSA. Dust and Airborne Particulates: Prevent deposition of dust and other particulates in HVAC ducts and

equipment.1. Cleaning of ductwork is not contemplated under this Contract.2. Contractor shall bear the cost of cleaning required due to failure to protect ducts and equipment

from construction dust.B. Airborne Contaminants: Procedures and products have been specified to minimize indoor air pollutants.

1. Furnish products meeting the specifications.2. Avoid construction practices that could result in contamination of installed products leading to

indoor air pollution.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASHRAE Std 62.1 - Laboratory Method of Testing to Determine the Sound Power in a Duct; 2013.B. ASHRAE Std 129 - Measuring Air-Change Effectiveness; 1997 (Reaffirmed 2002).C. ASTM D5197 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Formaldehyde and Other Carbonyl

Compounds in Air (Active Sampler Methodology); 2009.D. CAL (CDPH SM) - Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical

Emissions From Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers; California Department of PublicHealth; v1.1, 2010.

E. EPA 600/4-90/010 - Compendium of Methods for the Determination of Air Pollutants in Indoor Air; April1990.

F. EPA 625/R-96/010b - Compendium of Methods for the Determination of Toxic Organic Compounds inAmbient Air; Jan-99.

G. SMACNA (OCC) - IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction; 2007.1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Adsorptive Materials: Gypsum board, acoustical ceiling tile and panels, carpet and carpet tile, fabrics,fibrous insulation, and other similar products.

B. Contaminants: Gases, vapors, regulated pollutants, airborne mold and mildew, and the like, asspecified.

C. Particulates: Dust, dirt, and other airborne solid matter.D. Wet Work: Concrete, plaster, coatings, and other products that emit water vapor or volatile organic

compounds during installation, drying, or curing.PART 3 EXECUTION2.01 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES

A. Prevent the absorption of moisture and humidity by adsorptive materials by:1. Sequencing the delivery of such materials so that they are not present in the building until wet work

is completed and dry.2. Delivery and storage of such materials in fully sealed moisture-impermeable packaging.3. Provide sufficient ventilation for drying within reasonable time frame.


B. Begin construction ventilation when building is substantially enclosed.C. Do not store construction materials or waste in mechanical or electrical rooms.D. Prior to use of return air ductwork without intake filters clean up and remove dust and debris generated

by construction activities.1. Inspect duct intakes, return air grilles, and terminal units for dust.2. Clean plenum spaces, including top sides of lay-in ceilings, outsides of ducts, tops of pipes and

conduit.3. Clean tops of doors and frames.4. Clean mechanical and electrical rooms, including tops of pipes, ducts, and conduit, equipment, and

supports.5. Clean return plenums of air handling units.6. Remove intake filters last, after cleaning is complete.

E. Do not perform dusty or dirty work after starting use of return air ducts without intake filters.F. Use other relevant recommendations of SMACNA (OCC) for avoiding unnecessary contamination due

to construction procedures.2.02 BUILDING FLUSH-OUT

A. Contractor's Option: Either full continuous flush-out OR satisfactory air contaminant testing is required,not both.

B. Perform building flush-out before occupancy.C. Do not start flush-out until:

1. All construction is complete.2. HVAC systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced for proper operation.3. Inspection of inside of return air ducts and terminal units confirms that cleaning is not necessary.4. New HVAC filtration media have been installed.

D. Building Flush-Out: Operate all ventilation systems at normal flow rates with 100 percent outside airuntil a total air volume of 14,000 cubic feet per square foot of floor area has been supplied.1. Obtain Owner's concurrence that construction is complete enough before beginning flush-out.2. Maintain interior temperature of at least 60 degrees F and interior relative humidity no higher than

60 percent.3. If additional construction involving materials that produce particulates or any of the specified

contaminants is conducted during flush-out, start flush-out over.4. If interior spaces must be occupied prior to completion of the flush-out, supply a minimum of 25

percent of the total air volume prior to occupancy, and:a. Begin ventilation at least three hours prior to daily occupancy.b. Continue ventilation during all occupied periods.c. Provide minimum outside air volume of 0.30 cfm per square foot or design minimum outside

air rate, whichever is greater.E. Install new HVAC filtration media after completion of flush-out and before occupancy or further testing.

2.03 AIR CONTAMINANT TESTINGA. Contractor's Option: Either full continuous flush-out OR satisfactory air contaminant testing is required,

not both.B. Perform air contaminant testing before occupancy.C. Do not start air contaminant testing until:

1. All construction is complete, including interior finishes.2. HVAC systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced for proper operation.3. New HVAC filtration media have been installed.

D. Indoor Air Samples: Collect from spaces representative of occupied areas:1. Collect samples while operable windows and exterior doors are closed, HVAC system is running

normally as if occupied, with design minimum outdoor air, but with the building unoccupied.


2. Collect samples from spaces in each contiguous floor area in each air handler zone, but not lessthan one sample per 25,000 square feet; take samples from areas having the least ventilation andthose having the greatest presumed source strength.

3. Collect samples from height from 36 inches to 72 inches above floor.4. Collect samples from same locations on 3 consecutive days during normal business hours;

average the results of each set of 3 samples.5. When retesting the same building areas, take samples from at least the same locations as in first

test.E. Outdoor Air Samples: Collect samples at outside air intake of each air handler at the same time as

indoor samples are taken.F. Analyze air samples and submit report.

2.04 VENTILATION EFFECTIVENESS TESTINGA. Perform ventilation effectiveness testing before occupancy.B. Do not begin ventilation effectiveness testing until:

1. HVAC testing, adjusting, and balancing has been satisfactorily completed.2. Building flush-out or air contaminant testing has been completed satisfactorily.3. New HVAC filtration media have been installed.

C. Test each air handler zone in accordance with ASHRAE Std 129.END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 01 5813 - 1 TEMPORARY PROJECTSIGNAGE

SECTION 01 5813TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE


A. Project identification sign. Provided by Nequette at a later date.1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Finishes, Painting: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping for duration of construction.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SIGN MATERIALS

A. Structure and Framing: New, wood, structurally adequate.2.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN

A. One sign of construction, design, and content shown on Drawings, location designated.B. Content:

1. Project number, title, logo and name of Owner as indicated on Contract Documents.2. Names and titles of authorities.3. Names and titles of Architect and Consultants.4. Name of Prime Contractor .

C. Graphic Design, Colors, Style of Lettering: Designated by Architect and The G Brand Graphic Design.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install project identification sign within 30 days after date fixed by Notice to Proceed.B. Install sign surface plumb and level, with butt joints. Anchor securely.

3.02 MAINTENANCEA. Maintain signs and supports clean, repair deterioration and damage.

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 01 6000 - 1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 6000PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS


A. Transportation, handling, storage and protection.B. Product option requirements.C. Substitution limitations and procedures.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions: Requirements for

VOC-restricted product categories.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identifyapplicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data toprovide information specific to this Project.

B. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electricalcharacteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functionalequipment and appliances.

C. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral partsand attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's

standard colors, textures, and patterns.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 NEW PRODUCTS

A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents.B. DO NOT USE products having any of the following characteristics:

1. Made of wood from newly cut old growth timber.C. Where all other criteria are met, Contractor shall give preference to products that:

1. If used on interior, have lower emissions, as defined in Section 01 6116.2. If wet-applied, have lower VOC content, as defined in Section 01 6116.3. Are extracted, harvested, and/or manufactured closer to the location of the project.4. Have longer documented life span under normal use.5. Result in less construction waste.6. Have a published GreenScreen Chemical Hazard Analysis.

2.02 PRODUCT OPTIONSA. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those

standards or description.B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers

named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a

request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

A. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution withContract Documents.

B. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter:1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the

specified product.

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 01 6000 - 2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

2. Agrees to provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.3. Agrees to coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the

Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent.

C. Substitution Submittal Procedure (after contract award):1. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product

equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer.3.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Package products for shipment in manner to prevent damage; for equipment, package to avoid loss offactory calibration.

B. If special precautions are required, attach instructions prominently and legibly on outside of packaging.C. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage

time and potential damage to stored materials.D. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.E. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding

areas.F. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct,

and products are undamaged.G. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or

damage, and to minimize handling.H. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible.

3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTIONA. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to

installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessivematerials handling and misapplication.

B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to

product.E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.F. Protect products from damage or deterioration due to construction operations, weather, precipitation,

humidity, temperature, sunlight and ultraviolet light, dirt, dust, and other contaminants.G. Comply with manufacturer's warranty conditions, if any.H. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent

condensation and degradation of products.I. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining.J. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or

damage.K. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are

undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 01 7000 - 1 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUTREQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 7000EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS


A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures.B. Pre-installation meetings.C. Cutting and patching.D. Surveying for laying out the work.E. Cleaning and protection.F. Starting of systems and equipment.G. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel.H. Closeout procedures.I. General requirements for maintenance service.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance data,

warranties and bonds.B. Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training: Demonstration of products and systems to be

commissioned and where indicated in specific specification sectionsC. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work.

1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work.2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and locations of the

work are in conformance with Contract Documents.3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record.

C. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects:1. Structural integrity of any element of Project.2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element.3. The safety of any operational element.4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor.6. Include in request:

a. Identification of Project.b. Location and description of affected work.c. Necessity for cutting or alteration.d. Description of proposed work and products to be used.e. Effect on work of Owner or separate Contractor.f. Written permission of affected separate Contractor.g. Date and time work will be executed.

1.04 QUALIFICATIONSA. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in Tennessee and acceptable to Architect. Submit

evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an InsuranceCertificate.

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping

equipment.


B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soilerosion.

C. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulationof dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.

D. Erosion and Sediment Control: Plan and execute work by methods to control surface drainage fromcuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation.1. Provide temporary measures such as berms, dikes, and drains, to prevent water flow.2. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or clays.3. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly apply

corrective measures.1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensureefficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions foraccommodating items installed later.

B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements.C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with

building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities forinstalling, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.

D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that areindicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closelyas practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximizeaccessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.

E. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work

not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS

A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching andextending work.

B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary,referring to existing work as a standard.

C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution describedin Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.


A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start ofwork means acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied orattached.

C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste

due to over-ordering or misfabrication.E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations.F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to

damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions


affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existingconditions.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying

any new material or substance in contact or bond.3.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the site prior tocommencing work of the section.

B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section.C. Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date.D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to

Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.3.04 LAYING OUT THE WORK

A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work.B. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered.C. Contractor shall locate and protect survey control and reference points.D. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during

construction.E. Promptly report to Architect, Kebs Engineering the loss or destruction of any reference point or

relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons.F. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without

prior written notice to Architect.G. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices.H. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate

means:1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility

locations, slopes, and invert elevations.2. Grid or axis for structures.3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations, and setbacks.

I. Periodically verify layouts by same means.J. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.

3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTSA. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and

recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated.C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines,

unless otherwise indicated.D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated.E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.

3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHINGA. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching.B. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to:

1. Complete the work.2. Fit products together to integrate with other work.


3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services.4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work.5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition.6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work.7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.8. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.

C. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces toreceive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition.

D. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, andsight exposed surfaces.

E. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval.F. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.G. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.H. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire

rated material in accordance with Section 07 8400, to full thickness of the penetrated element.I. Patching:

1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous surfaces,refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.

2. Match color, texture, and appearance.3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due

to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairingfinish.

3.07 PROGRESS CLEANINGA. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly

condition.B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or

remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to

eliminate dust.D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site;

do not burn or bury.3.08 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK

A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work

area to prevent damage.D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy

objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain

recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer.G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible.

3.09 SYSTEM STARTUPA. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.B. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation,

belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage.


C. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by theequipment or system manufacturer.

D. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.E. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's

representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.F. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONA. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training.B. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of

Substantial Completion.C. Provide a qualified person who is knowledgeable about the Project to perform demonstration and

instruction of owner personnel.D. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with

Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.3.11 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.3.12 FINAL CLEANING

A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment.1. Clean areas to be occupied by Owner prior to final completion before Owner occupancy.

B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous.C. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign

substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.D. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or nameplates

on mechanical and electrical equipment.E. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface

and material being cleaned.F. Clean filters of operating equipment.G. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, scuppers, overflow drains, area drains, drainage systems,

and ______.H. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.I. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in

legal manner; do not burn or bury.J. Clean Owner-occupied areas of work.

3.13 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURESA. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities.

1. Provide copies to Architect.2. Provide copies to Owner.

B. Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completionor correction in the Contractor's Correction Punch List for Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion.

C. Notify Architect and LIV Development when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion.D. Submit written certification containing Contractor's Correction Punch List, that Contract Documents have

been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with ContractDocuments and ready for Architect's Substantial Completion inspection.

E. Owner will occupy all of the building as specified in Section 01 1000.


F. Conduct Substantial Completion inspection and create Final Correction Punch List containing Architect'sand Contractor's comprehensive list of items identified to be completed or corrected and submit toArchitect.

G. Correct items of work listed in Final Correction Punch List and comply with requirements for access toOwner-occupied areas.

H. Notify Architect, LIV Development when work is considered finally complete.I. Complete items of work determined by Architect's and LIV Development's final inspection.

3.14 MAINTENANCEA. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections.B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one year

from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whichever is longer.C. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and

lubricate as required.D. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts

whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component.E. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without prior

written consent of the Owner.END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 01 7419 - 1 CONSTRUCTION WASTEMANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

SECTION 01 7419CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS

A. Owner requires that this project generate the least amount of trash and waste possible.B. Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poor planning,

breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors.C. Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills; reuse, salvage, or recycle as much waste as economically

feasible.D. Methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are:

1. Burning on the project site.2. Burying on the project site.3. Dumping or burying on other property, public or private.4. Other illegal dumping or burying.

E. Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatoryrequirements, including but not limited to Federal, state and local requirements, pertaining to legaldisposal of all construction and demolition waste materials.

1.02 DEFINITIONSA. Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, or the like.B. Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials, packaging,

trash, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair and demolition operations.C. Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity or

reactivity.D. Nonhazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility,

corrosivity, toxicity, or reactivity.E. Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period of exposure.F. Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle and

remanufactured into a new product for reuse by others.G. Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufacture into a new

product for reuse by others.H. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid waste and other

discarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not include burning,incinerating, or thermally destroying waste.

I. Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit.J. Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site.K. Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by others.L. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well production

run-off water.M. Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning from the

first time they become waste.N. Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure.O. Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or salvaged.P. Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use. Waste

includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.


B. Waste Disposal Reports: Submit at specified intervals, with details of quantities of trash and waste,means of disposal or reuse, and costs; show both totals to date and since last report.1. Submit updated Report with each Application for Progress Payment; failure to submit Report will

delay payment.2. Submit Report on a form acceptable to Owner.3. Landfill Disposal: Include the following information:

a. Identification of material.b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, of trash/waste material from the project disposed of in landfills.c. State the identity of landfills, total amount of tipping fees paid to landfill, and total disposal

cost.d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost.

4. Incinerator Disposal: Include the following information:a. Identification of material.b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, of trash/waste material from the project delivered to

incinerators.c. State the identity of incinerators, total amount of fees paid to incinerator, and total disposal

cost.d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost.

5. Recycled and Salvaged Materials: Include the following information for each:a. Identification of material, including those retrieved by installer for use on other projects.b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, date removed from the project site, and receiving party.c. Transportation cost, amount paid or received for the material, and the net total cost or savings

of salvage or recycling each material.d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost.e. Certification by receiving party that materials will not be disposed of in landfills or by

incineration.6. Material Reused on Project: Include the following information for each:

a. Identification of material and how it was used in the project.b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards.c. Include weight tickets as evidence of quantity.

7. Other Disposal Methods: Include information similar to that described above, as appropriate todisposal method.

PART 3 EXECUTION2.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES

A. See Section 01 3000 for additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittal procedures,and project documentation.

B. See Section 01 5000 for additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal facilitiesand services.

C. See Section 01 6000 for waste prevention requirements related to delivery, storage, and handling.D. See Section 01 7000 for trash/waste prevention procedures related to demolition, cutting and patching,

installation, protection, and cleaning.2.02 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. Manager: Designate an on-site person or persons responsible for instructing workers and overseeingand documenting results of the Waste Management Plan.

B. Communication: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to job site foreman, eachsubcontractor, Owner, and Architect.

C. Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling, salvage,reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project.

D. Meetings: Discuss trash/waste management goals and issues at project meetings.1. Regular job-site meetings.


E. Facilities: Provide specific facilities for separation and storage of materials for recycling, salvage, reuse,return, and trash disposal, for use by all contractors and installers.1. Provide containers as required.2. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors.

F. Hazardous Wastes: Separate, store, and dispose of hazardous wastes according to applicableregulations.

G. Recycling: Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable waste products in orderto prevent contamination of materials and to maximize recyclability of identified materials. Arrange fortimely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facility in order to prevent contamination ofrecyclable materials.

H. Reuse of Materials On-Site: Set aside, sort, and protect separated products in preparation for reuse.I. Salvage: Set aside, sort, and protect products to be salvaged for reuse off-site.

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 01 7800 - 1 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

SECTION 01 7800CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS


A. Project Record Documents.B. Operation and Maintenance Data.C. Warranties and bonds.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data,

and samples.B. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data.C. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect and LIV Development with claim for final

Application for Payment.B. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start ofWork. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments.

2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operatedby Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance.

3. Submit one copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will bereviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of alldocument sets as required prior to final submission.

4. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection.C. Warranties and Bonds:

1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner'spermission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance.

2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Applicationfor Payment.

3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submitwithin 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warrantyperiod.

PART 3 EXECUTION2.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work:1. Drawings.2. Specifications.3. Addenda.4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.

B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.D. Record information concurrent with construction progress.E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed,

including the following:1. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.

F. Record Drawings : Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including:1. Field changes of dimension and detail.2. Details not on original Contract drawings.


2.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATAA. Source Data: For each product or system, list names, addresses and telephone numbers of

Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data

applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and

systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenancedrawings.

D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for eachprocedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.

2.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHESA. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish:B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and

methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended schedulefor cleaning and maintenance.

C. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions,have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specificproducts.

2.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMSA. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System:

1. Description of unit or system, and component parts.2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests.4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.

B. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions,have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specificproducts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions andsequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Includesummer, winter, and any special operating instructions.

D. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance andtrouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing,and checking instructions.

E. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.F. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.G. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.H. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for

maintenance.I. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.

2.05 ASSEMBLY OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALSA. Assemble operation and maintenance data into durable manuals for Owner's personnel use, with data

arranged in the same sequence as, and identified by, the specification sections.B. Where systems involve more than one specification section, provide separate tabbed divider for each

system.C. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described

products.D. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual.


E. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers; 2inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistentgroupings.

F. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCEINSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents.

G. Project Directory: Title and address of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect,Consultants, Contractor and subcontractors, with names of responsible parties.

H. Tables of Contents: List every item separated by a divider, using the same identification as on thedivider tab; where multiple volumes are required, include all volumes Tables of Contents in eachvolume, with the current volume clearly identified.

I. Dividers: Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system; identify the contents on thedivider tab; immediately following the divider tab include a description of product and major componentparts of equipment.

J. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound paper.K. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of

text pages.L. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description

identified, in three parts as follows:1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Contractor,

Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by

specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers ofSubcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following:a. Significant design criteria.b. List of equipment.c. Operating instructions.d. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.e. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and

materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:

a. Shop drawings and product data.b. Photocopies of warranties and bonds.

M. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect,Consultants, and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems,indexed to content of the volume.

2.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDSA. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and

manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put intouse with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until Date of Substantialcompletion is determined.

B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.C. Co-execute submittals when required.D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.E. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing. Provide

full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier, andmanufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal.

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 01 7900 - 1 DEMONSTRATION ANDTRAINING

SECTION 01 7900DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SUMMARY

A. Demonstration of products and systems where indicated in specific specification sections.B. Training of Owner personnel in operation and maintenance is required for:

1. All software-operated systems.2. HVAC systems and equipment.3. Plumbing equipment.4. Electrical systems and equipment.5. Landscape irrigation.6. Key card access and security systems.

C. Training of Owner personnel in care, cleaning, maintenance, and repair is required for:1. Finishes, including flooring, wall finishes, ceiling finishes.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 9113 - General Commissioning Requirements: Additional requirements applicable to

demonstration and training.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Training Plan: Owner will designate personnel to be trained; tailor training to needs and skill-level of

attendees.1. Submit not less than four weeks prior to start of training.2. Revise and resubmit until acceptable.3. Provide an overall schedule showing all training sessions.4. Include at least the following for each training session:

a. Identification, date, time, and duration.b. Description of products and/or systems to be covered.c. Name of firm and person conducting training; include qualifications.d. Intended audience, such as job description.e. Objectives of training and suggested methods of ensuring adequate training.f. Methods to be used, such as classroom lecture, live demonstrations, hands-on, etc.g. Media to be used, such a slides, hand-outs, etc.h. Training equipment required, such as projector, projection screen, etc., to be provided by

Contractor.C. Training Manuals: Provide training manual for each attendee; allow for minimum of two attendees per

training session.1. Include applicable portion of O&M manuals.2. Include copies of all hand-outs, slides, overheads, video presentations, etc., that are not included

in O&M manuals.3. Provide one extra copy of each training manual to be included with operation and maintenance

data.1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Instructor Qualifications: Familiar with design, operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of therelevant products and systems. 1. Provide as instructors the most qualified trainer of those contractors and/or installers who actually

supplied and installed the systems and equipment.2. Where a single person is not familiar with all aspects, provide specialists with necessary

qualifications.

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 01 7900 - 2 DEMONSTRATION ANDTRAINING

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 DEMONSTRATION - GENERAL

A. Demonstrations conducted during system start-up do not qualify as demonstrations for the purposes ofthis section, unless approved in advance by Owner.

B. Demonstration may be combined with Owner personnel training if applicable.C. Operating Equipment and Systems: Demonstrate operation in all modes, including start-up, shut-down,

seasonal changeover, emergency conditions, and troubleshooting, and maintenance procedures,including scheduled and preventive maintenance.1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion.2. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season

within six months.D. Non-Operating Products: Demonstrate cleaning, scheduled and preventive maintenance, and repair

procedures.1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion.

3.02 TRAINING - GENERALA. Conduct training on-site unless otherwise indicated.B. Owner will provide classroom and seating at no cost to Contractor.C. Provide training in minimum two hour segments.D. Training schedule will be subject to availability of Owner's personnel to be trained; re-schedule training

sessions as required by Owner; once schedule has been approved by Owner failure to conductsessions according to schedule will be cause for Owner to charge Contractor for personnel "show-up"time.

E. Review of Facility Policy on Operation and Maintenance Data: During training discuss:1. The location of the O&M manuals and procedures for use and preservation; backup copies.2. Typical contents and organization of all manuals, including explanatory information, system

narratives, and product specific information.3. Typical uses of the O&M manuals.

F. Product- and System-Specific Training:1. Review the applicable O&M manuals.2. For systems, provide an overview of system operation, design parameters and constraints, and

operational strategies.3. Review instructions for proper operation in all modes, including start-up, shut-down, seasonal

changeover and emergency procedures, and for maintenance, including preventativemaintenance.

4. Provide hands-on training on all operational modes possible and preventive maintenance.5. Emphasize safe and proper operating requirements; discuss relevant health and safety issues and

emergency procedures.6. Discuss common troubleshooting problems and solutions.7. Discuss any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation.8. Discuss warranties and guarantees, including procedures necessary to avoid voiding coverage.9. Review recommended tools and spare parts inventory suggestions of manufacturers.10. Review spare parts and tools required to be furnished by Contractor.11. Review spare parts suppliers and sources and procurement procedures.

G. Be prepared to answer questions raised by training attendees; if unable to answer during trainingsession, provide written response within three days.

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 9 08160 - 1 MOLDED INTERIOR DOORS

SECTION 9 08160MOLDED INTERIOR DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Bifold DoorsB. Passage Doors

1.02 REFERENCESA. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

1. ANSI Z97.1: Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications andMethods of Test

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)1. NFPA 252: Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)1. UL10B: Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies (Note: Neutral pressure testing standard)2. UL 10C: Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

D. Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC)1. CAN4-S104: Standard Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

E. Uniform Building Code Standard 7-2 (UBC)1. 1. UBC 7-2 (1994): Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. (Note: Neutral pressure testing standard).2. UBC 7-2 (1997): Fire Test of Door Assemblies. (Note: Positive pressure testing standard).

1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTSA. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Fire door assemblies shall meet or exceed fire-protection ratings indicated

when tested in accordance with NFPA 252.B. Where indicated in the drawings.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate sizes, profiles, and attachments.C. Samples: Provide samples for all products.D. Quality Assurance Submittals

1. Manufacturer Instructions: Provide manufacturer's written installation instructions.1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Coordinate with Contractor to deliver doors as needed, minimizing need for on-site storage.B. Deliver doors, materials and components in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers

with identification labels intact.C. Store doors as recommended by manufacturer.

1.06 WARRANTYA. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty indicating that the door will be fre from material and

workmanship defects from the date of substantial completion for the time period indicated below.B. Time period of warranty:

1. 5 yearsPART 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. JELD-WEN® Interior Doors; 3305 Lakeport Blvd; Klamath Falls, OR 97601, USA; Phone 877.535.3462,fax 541.882.3455; website www.jeld-wen.com <http://www.jeld-wen.com>.

B. Basis of Design: Doors are based on JELD-WEN®'s Molded Interior Doors.

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 9 08160 - 2 MOLDED INTERIOR DOORS

C. Style: Santa Fe.D. Or Approved Equal.

2.02 DOORSA. Door Design:

1. Surface Finish: Smooth2. Panels and Sticking Profile:

a. Ovolo sticking.B. Core:

1. Hollow core.a. Thickness: 1-3/8 inch.

C. Hardware:1. Finish: Oil Rubbed Bronze

D. Door Finish:1. Pre-primed for field painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 GENERAL

A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's installation guidelines and recommendations.3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect door prior to installation.B. Inspect rough opening for compliance with door manufacturer recommendations. Verify rough opening

conditions are within recommended tolerances.3.03 PREPARATION

A. Prepare door for installation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.B. Trim bottom of jamb sides to achieve desired distance between door bottom and finished floor height.

3.04 DOOR INSTALLATIONA. Place door unit into opening and level hinge side of jamb. Use shims fastened through jamb and stop to

level and temporarily secure in place.B. Level latch side of jamb. Use shims fastened through jamb and stop to level and temporarily secure in

place.C. Verify spacing between jamb and door is uniform on all sides. Adjust as necessary.D. Shim top of jamb in center of opening and fasten with nail.E. Re-check for square, level and even spacing around door. Nail securely in place through stop, jamb,

shims and into studs every 12 inches.F. Set nails.G. Install trim on both sides using nails every 12 to 16 inches.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Protect finished doors until project completion.B. Touch-up or replace damaged doors as necessary.

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 9 08531 - 1 VINYL (PVC) WINDOWS

SECTION 9 08531VINYL (PVC) WINDOWS


A. All windows of the types and sizes called for in this specification shall be furnished with necessaryhardware and

B. Miscellaneous equipment as specified herein and shall be manufactured by same manufacturer aswindows.

1.02 1.02 RELATED SECTIONSA. Section 06100 - Rough CarpentryB. Section 07461 - Composite Wood Siding And Trim

1.03 1.03 REFERENCESA. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM)

1. ASTM B 456 - Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromiumand Nickel Plus Chromium, 2008.

2. ASTM F 588- Standard Test Methods for Measuring the Forced Entry Resistance of WindowAssemblies, Excluding Glazing Impact, 2007.

3. ASTM B 766 - Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Cadmium, 2003.4. ASTM D 638 - Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics, 2008.5. ASTM D 4216 - Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) and Related PVC and

Chlorinated PolyVinyl Chloride (CPVC) Building Products Compounds, 2006.6. ASTM D 4726 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Exterior-Profile

Extrusions Used for Assembled Windows and Doors, 2002.B. AAMA:

1. AAMA 701/702 - Combined Voluntary Specification for Pile Weatherstrip and ReplaceableFenestration Weatherseals, 2004.

2. AAMA 902 - Voluntary Specification for Sash Balances, 2007.3. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-05 or 08 - Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC)

and Wood Windows and Glass Doors, 2008.1.04 1.04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE DESCRIPTION

A. Single, Twin, and Triple Unit Air Infiltration shall exceed 0.30 CFM/SqFt when tested in accordance with:AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-05 or 08

B. Unit Water Penetration Resistance Pressure vs. size when tested in accordance with:AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-05 or 081. 7.52 PSF for single unit sizes up to 48” x 77”2. 6.06 PSF for twin unit sizes up to 96" x 77"3. 7.52 PSF for twin unit sizes up to 76” x 77”4. 7.52 PSF for triple unit sizes up to 107” x 77”

C. Unit Structural Performance ratings vs. size when tested in accordance with AAMA / WDMA / CSA101/I.S.2/A440-05 or 08.1. H-R50 for single unit sizes up to 38" x 57"2. H-R45 for single unit sizes jup to 36" x 72"3. H-R35 for single unit sizes up to 48" x 57"4. H-R35 for single unit sizes up to 38" x 77"5. H-R25 for signle unit sizes up to 48" x 77"6. H-R50 for twin units up to 76" x 65"7. H-R45 for twin units up to 72" x 72"8. H-R40 for twin units up to 76" x 77"9. H-R35 for twin units up to 96" x 57"10. H-R25 for twin units up to 107" x 57"


11. H-R45 for triple units up to 107" x 57"12. H-R40 for triple units up to 107" x 77"

D. Where needed, supplemental reinforcements and glass packages shall be available to increase unitperformance.

E. Design Pressures.1. H-R50 for single unit sizes up to 36" x 72"2. H-R50 for triple units up to 107" x 57"

F. Unit Thermal Performance ratings vs. size when tested in accordance with: NFRC 100, 200 and 5001. Window shall achieve NFRC thermal u-value rating of 0.47 BTU/hr/SqFt/Fº and a Solar Heat Gain

Coefficient of .62 with clear glass and no argon gas fill2. Window shall achieve NFRC thermal u-value rating of 0.35 BTU/hr/SqFt/Fº and a Solar Heat Gain

Coefficient of .33 using Low E 272 and no argon gas fill.3. Window shall achieve NFRC thermal u-value rating of 0.31 BTU/hr/SqFt/Fº and a Solar Heat Gain

Coefficient of .33 using Low E 272 and argon gas fill.4. Window shall achieve NFRC thermal u-value rating of 0.34 BTU/hr/SqFt/Fº and a Solar Heat Gain

Coefficient of .22 using Low E 366 and no argon gas fill.5. Window shall achieve NFRC thermal u-value rating of 0.31 BTU/hr/SqFt/Fº and a Solar Heat Gain

Coefficient of .21 using Low E 366 and argon gas fill.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013300 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.B. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard details and catalog data demonstrating compliance

with referenced standards. Include Installation Instructions.C. C. Provide third-party certification that window meets or exceeds AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-05

or 08 Structural ratings per section 1.04.A.D. Shop Drawings; Submit the following:

1. Elevation for each style window specified; indicate sizes, glazing types, muntin pattern anddesigns.

2. Schedule: Indicate each window in project; reference each unit to specific elevation detail.3. Details: Head, jamb and sill details for each project condition.

E. Quality Assurance Submittals: Evidence of certifications of window units required in Quality AssuranceArticle of this section.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years of documented experience producing products of

the type specified in this section.B. Certifications:

1. Provide window units rated for air infiltration, water penetration and structural performance perAAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-05 or 08 and certified by independent third-party agent.

2. Provide window units rated and certified for thermal performance by NFRC, and for seal integrity ofinsulating glass seal.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Protect products from moisture, construction traffic, and damage in according with manufacturer's

printed instructions.B. Do not use non-vented plastic or canvas shelters; open plastic wrapper immediately upon delivery to

provide ventilation.1.08 WARRANTY

A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Furnish manufacturer's Limited Lifetime Warranty on window products.


PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER

A. Silver Line Building Products, Series 3000/3900 Double Hung including Single, Double and Triple units.B. Or Approved Equal.

2.02 2.02 COMPONENTSA. Vinyl Extrusions: Multi-chamber extrusions of impact-resistant exterior-grade rigid polyvinyl chloride

(PVC) complying with ASTM D 4726, ASTM D 4216 and ASTM D 638 standards.B. Insulating Glass Unit: Unit thickness 7/8 inch:

1. Insulating Glass products shall be permanently marked either on spacers or on an insulating unitcomponent with certification label of Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC).

2. Insulating Glass shall comply to the ASTM E2190 standard.3. Insulating Glass type selection shall comply to the ASTM E1300 standard.4. Air Chamber: Hermetically sealed space between panes.5. Standard clear glazing may be used if permissable by local codes.6. LoE2 glazing shall be used where required.7. Low conductance spacer.

C. Screens: Installabel from interior side, providing only ventilation and reasonable insect control whenoperable sash is in open position: re-screenable using fiberglass mesh, 16x18 gage, secured inchannel of aluminum box frame with continuous vinyl spline; frame color matching window frame andsash color.

D. Operating hardware: Types for specified operable-sash windows; sight-exposed hardware ofUV-stabilized, engineered plastic, color matched to vinyl extrusions for uniform appearance.

E. Fasteners: All screws and other miscellaneous fastening devices incorporated shall be of aluminum,stainless steel, or other non-corrosive material compatible with vinyl extrusions. Cadmium or zinc platedsteel, where used, shall be in accordance with ASTM B 766 or ASTM B 633. Nickel or chrome platedsteel, where used, shall be in accordance with ASTM B 456.

F. Weatherstripping: Types for specified operable sash windows and operable doors.G. Integral Muntins ("Grill Between Glass"): Aluminum pre-finished to match window frame,

factory-mounted between panes of insulating glass unit before sealing glass unit.2.03 DOUBLE HUNG WINDOWS

A. Configurations:1. Windows must be a true Double Hung unit with both upper and lower sash operable and able to tilt

inward for cleaning.2. Windows must be available as individual Double Hung units and as Integral Twin and Triple units

with two or three pair of operational sash respectively in one continuous unit frame.B. B. Operable-Sash Windows:

1. Frame and sash: Vinyl extrusions, nominal extrusion wall thickness 0.070 inch. Mitered andfusion-welded corners: integral 2 inch pre-punched nailing fin four sides; all upper and lower sashmust tilt-in for cleaning; integral glazing provision: molded-in lift handles.

2. Factory Glazing: 7/8 inch Insulating Glass Unit.3. Operating Hardware:

a. Locks: Cam-type sash lock and keeper, capable of meeting ASTM F 588 forced entryresistance, engineered to force meeting stiles/rails with interlock for minimum air infiltration.

b. Balances: Block and tackle balances, meeting requirements of AAMA 902, providingmaintenance free operation without post-installation adjustment or lubrication.

4. Weatherstripping: Double-row high-density silicone-treated wool pile, with double mylar fin,meeting requirements of AAMA 701.

5. Screens: Frame color matching window frame and sash color.a. Full size: Integral rails.

6. Muntins: Integral, patterns as indicated in the drawings.


C. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of available colors.D. Styles and Sizes: As indicated in the drawings.

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. Mullion Posts: Extruded aluminum, color matching adjacent window frame.

1. Exterior and interior mullion trim accessories including wood build out, dry wall receiver and vinyldry wall return.

B. Exterior and interior trim accessories including wood build out, dry wall receiver and vinyl dry wall return.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Installer to verify that project conditions are acceptable before beginning installation of products; verifythat rough openings are as indicated, and are correct sizes for installation clearances as specified inmanufacturer's instructions.

B. Correct any unacceptable conditions before proceeding with installation.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions and approved shopdrawings.

B. Install products plumb and in true alignment; fasten to achieve maximum operational effectiveness andbest appearance of units.

3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANINGA. Ensure that windows operate correctly, free from biding or other defects.B. Clean and restore soled surfaces; remove scraps and debris, and leave site in clean condition.

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 03 1000 - 1 CONCRETE FORMING ANDACCESSORIES

SECTION 03 1000CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES

PART 2 PRODUCTS1.01 FORMWORK - GENERAL

A. Provide concrete forms, accessories, shoring, and bracing as required to accomplish cast-in-placeconcrete work.

B. Design and construct to provide resultant concrete that conforms to design with respect to shape, lines,and dimensions.

C. Comply with applicable state and local codes with respect to design, fabrication, erection, and removalof formwork.

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 03 2000 - 1 CONCRETE REINFORCING

SECTION 03 2000CONCRETE REINFORCING

PART 2 PRODUCTS1.01 REINFORCEMENT1.02 FABRICATION

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 03 5400 - 1 CAST UNDERLAYMENT

SECTION 03 5400CAST UNDERLAYMENT


A. Liquid-applied self-leveling floor underlayment.1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars(Using 2-in. or (50-mm) Cube Specimens); 2013.

B. ASTM C348 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic-Cement Mortars; 2014.C. ASTM C472 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum, Gypsum Plasters and Gypsum

Concrete; 1999 (Reapproved 2014).D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2015a.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section, and approved by

manufacturer.1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install underlayment until floor penetrations and peripheral work are complete.B. Maintain minimum ambient temperatures of 50 degrees F 24 hours before, during and 72 hours after

installation of underlayment.C. During the curing process, ventilate spaces to remove excess moisture.


A. Gypsum-Based Underlayment: Gypsum based mix, that when mixed with water in accordance withmanufacturer's directions will produce self-leveling underlayment with the following properties:1. Compressive Strength: Minimum 2500 psi, tested per ASTM C472.2. Density: Maximum 115 lb/cu ft.3. Final Set Time: 1 to 2 hours, maximum.4. Thickness: 3/4 inch to maximum 3-1/2 inch.5. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 0/0 in accordance with

ASTM E84.B. Water: Potable and not detrimental to underlayment mix materials.C. Primer: Manufacturer's recommended type.D. Joint and Crack Filler: Latex based filler, as recommended by manufacturer.


A. Verify that substrate surfaces are clean, dry, unfrozen, do not contain petroleum byproducts, or othercompounds detrimental to underlayment material bond to substrate.

3.02 APPLICATIONA. Install underlayment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Place to indicated thickness, with top surface level to 1/8 inch in 10 ft.

3.03 CURINGA. Once underlayment starts to set, prohibit foot traffic until final set has been reached.B. Air cure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

END OF SECTION

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20E84















15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 03 5400 - 2 CAST UNDERLAYMENT


15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 04 0511 - 1 MORTAR AND MASONRYGROUT

SECTION 04 0511MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT


A. Mortar for masonry.B. Grout for masonry.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 04 7200 - Cast Stone Masonry: Installation of mortar.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ACI 530/530.1/ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures and

Related Commentaries; 2011.B. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 - Specification for Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute

International; 2008.C. ASTM C91/C91M - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2012.D. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2015.E. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2011.F. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2015.G. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2014a.H. ASTM C979/C979M - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete; 2010.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA, except where exceeded by requirements of the contract

documents.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter.1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48hours after completion of masonry work.

B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during, and 48hours after completion of masonry work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MORTAR AND GROUT APPLICATIONS

A. Mortar Mix Designs: ASTM C270, Property Specification.2.02 MATERIALS

A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type N.1. Colored mortar: Premixed cement as required to match Architect's color sample.

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I - Normal; color as required to produce approved color sample. C. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144.D. Pigments for Colored Mortar: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments specifically intended for mixing into

mortar and complying with ASTM C979/C979M.1. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.2. Manufacturers:

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 04 0511 - 2 MORTAR AND MASONRYGROUT

a. Solomon Colors; Product Iron Oxide Pigments For The Masonry Industry: www.solomoncolors.com.

b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.E. Water: Clean and potable.

2.03 MORTAR MIXESA. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, Property Specification.

1. Masonry below grade and in contact with earth: Type S.2. Exterior, loadbearing masonry: Type S.3. Exterior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type N.4. Pointing mortar: Type N with maximum 2 percent ammonium stearate or calcium stearate per

cement weight.2.04 MORTAR MIXING

A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients using mechanical batch mixer, in accordance with ASTM C270 andin quantities needed for immediate use.

B. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process.C. Add mortar color in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and

coloration.D. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar.E. If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper only within two hours of mixing.

2.05 GROUT MIXESA. Engineered Masonry: 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-10 inches slump; provide premixed type in

accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install mortar and grout to requirements of section(s) in which masonry is specified.B. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids.C. Remove excess mortar from grout spaces.

3.02 GROUTINGA. Use either high-lift or low-lift grouting techniques, at Contractor's option, subject to other limitations of

contract documents.B. Low-Lift Grouting:

1. Limit height of pours to 12 inches.2. Limit height of masonry to 16 inches above each pour.3. Pour grout only after vertical reinforcing is in place; place horizontal reinforcing as grout is poured.

Prevent displacement of bars as grout is poured.4. Place grout for each pour continuously and consolidate immediately; do not interrupt pours for

more than 1-1/2 hours. C. High-Lift Grouting:

1. Verify that horizontal and vertical reinforcement is in proper position and adequately securedbefore beginning pours.

2. Place grout for spanning elements in single, continuous pour. END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 04 2000 - 1 UNIT MASONRY

SECTION 04 2000UNIT MASONRY


A. Concrete Block.B. Reinforcement and Anchorage.C. Flashings.D. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 04 0511 - Mortar and Masonry Grout.B. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing control and expansion joints.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ACI 530/530.1/ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures and

Related Commentaries; 2011.B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware;

2009.C. ASTM A240/A240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate,

Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications; 2015b.D. ASTM A641/A641M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire; 2009a

(Reapproved 2014).E. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement,

Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2015.F. ASTM C62 - Standard Specification for Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale);

2013.G. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2014.

1.04 MOCK-UPA. Construct a masonry wall as a mock-up panel sized 8 feet long by 6 feet high; include mortar,

accessories, structural backup, and flashings (with lap joint, corner, and end dam) in mock-up.1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage andcontamination by other materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows:1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 by 8 inches and nominal depth of 8

inches.2. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C90, normal weight.

a. Hollow block, as indicated.2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Mortar and Grout: As specified in Section 04 0511.2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE

A. Manufacturers:1. Blok-Lok Limited; _______: www.blok-lok.com.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.


B. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss or ladder type; ASTM A1064/A1064M steel wire, millgalvanized to ASTM A641/A641M, Class 3; 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch cross rods; width asrequired to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage on eachexposure.

C. Two-Piece Wall Ties: Formed steel wire, 0.1875 inch thick, adjustable, eye and pintle type, hot dipgalvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B, sized to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2inch of mortar coverage from masonry face and to allow vertical adjustment of up to 1-1/4 in.

2.04 FLASHINGSA. Stainless Steel/Polymer Fabric Drainage Plane Flashing: ASTM A240/A240M stainless steel sheet

bonded with rubber-based adhesive between one sheet of polymer fabric and one sheet of non-wovendrainage material, with manufacturer's standard, self adhering, stainless steel lap tape.1. Manufacturers:

a. York Manufacturing, Inc; Flash-Vent SS: www.yorkmfg.com.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Flexible Flashing with Elvaloy KEE: Solid-phase plasticizer and flexibilizer added to membrane flashing.2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Preformed Control Joints: Rubber material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, fused joints.B. Drainage Fabric: Polyester or polypropylene mesh.

1. Manufacturers:a. Mortar Net Solutions; _______: www.mortarnet.com.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located.C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections.

3.03 COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTSA. Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA or applicable building code, whichever is more

stringent.3.04 COURSING

A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform

thickness.C. Concrete Masonry Units:

1. Bond: Running.D. Brick Units:

1. Bond: As indicated for different locations.3.05 PLACING AND BONDING

A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work.B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.C. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.


3.06 WEEPS/CAVITY VENTSA. Install weeps in veneer and cavity walls at 24 inches on center horizontally above through-wall flashing,

above shelf angles and lintels, and at bottom of walls.3.07 CAVITY MORTAR CONTROL

A. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weep/cavity vents.3.08 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - GENERAL

A. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified under specific wall type, install horizontal jointreinforcement 16 inches on center.

3.09 MASONRY FLASHINGSA. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all locations

where downward flow of water will be interrupted.B. Extend metal flashings to within 1/4 inch of exterior face of masonry.C. Extend plastic and laminated flashings to within 1/4 inch of exterior face of masonry.

3.10 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTSA. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control or expansion joints.B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in accordance

with manufacturer's instructions.3.11 BUILT-IN WORK

A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames and other items to be built into the work andfurnished under other sections.

B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line.3.12 CUTTING AND FITTING

A. Cut and fit for chases. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, andlocation.

3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 4000 -

Quality Requirements.3.14 CLEANING

A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings.B. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.

3.15 PROTECTIONA. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that are

subject to damage by construction activities.END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 04 2001 - 1 MASONRY VENEER

SECTION 04 2001MASONRY VENEER


A. Concrete Block.B. Clay Facing Brick.C. Hollow Brick.D. Mortar and Grout.E. Flashings.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 04 0100 - Masonry Cleaning.B. Section 04 0511 - Mortar and Masonry Grout.C. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood stud backup for masonry veneer.D. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing control and expansion joints.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM B370 - Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction; 2012.B. ASTM C91/C91M - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2012.C. ASTM C216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale);

2014.D. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2014a.E. ASTM D4637/D4637M - Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used in Single-Ply Roof Membrane;

2013.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, and mortar.C. Samples: Submit four samples of facing brick units to illustrate color, texture, and extremes of color

range.D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.05 MOCK-UPA. Construct a masonry wall as a mock-up panel sized 8 feet long by 6 feet high; include mortar and

accessories and structural backup in mock-up.B. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and

contamination by other materials.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows:1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 by 8 inches and nominal depth of 8

inches.2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91/C91M Type N.1. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Water: Clean and potable.

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 04 2001 - 2 MASONRY VENEER

2.03 FLASHINGSA. Polymer Coated Copper Flashing: Polymer coating bonded to a 2 oz/sq ft copper sheet through a

fiberglass scrim.B. Copper/Rubberized Asphalt Flashing: 3 oz/sq ft copper sheet coated with elastic asphalt compound.C. EPDM Flashing: ASTM D4637/D4637, Type I, 0.040 inch thick.D. Copper: ASTM B370, 060 soft annealed; 20 oz/sq ft; natural finish.E. Prefabricated Metal Flashing: Smooth fabricated 12 oz/sq ft copper flashing for through-wall conditions.

2.04 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXESA. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, Proportion Specification.B. Colored Mortar: Proportion selected pigments and other ingredients to match Architect's sample,

without exceeding manufacturer's recommended pigment-to-cement ratio.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 COURSING

A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform

thickness.C. Concrete Masonry Units:D. Brick Units:

1. Bond: As indicated for different locations.2. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 8 inches.3. Mortar Joints: Concave.

3.02 PLACING AND BONDINGA. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work.B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.

3.03 WEEPS/CAVITY VENTSA. Install cavity vents in veneer walls at 32 inches on center horizontally below shelf angles and lintels and

at top of walls.3.04 MASONRY FLASHINGS

A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all locationswhere downward flow of water will be interrupted.

B. Extend metal flashings to within 1/4 inch of exterior face of masonry.C. Extend plastic, EPDM, and ______ flashings to within 1/4 inch of exterior face of masonry.

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 04 4200 - 1 EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING

SECTION 04 4200EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING


A. Cut limestone and sandstone veneer at exterior and interior walls.B. Cut stone for curtain wall infill panels.C. Metal anchors and supports.D. Sealing exterior joints.E. Pointing interior joints.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Steel framing members supporting stone.B. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing perimeter and expansion joints in interior stone work.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A240/A240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate,

Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications; 2015b.B. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet,

Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.C. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.D. ASTM C1248 - Standard Test Method for Staining of Porous Substrate by Joint Sealants; 2008

(Reapproved 2012).E. ASTM C1330 - Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid-Applied

Sealants; 2002 (Reapproved 2013).1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, pertinent dimensions, anchorages, head, jamb, and sill opening details,

and jointing methods.C. Samples: Submit two stone samples __ by __ inch in size, illustrating color range and texture,

markings, surface finish, and ________.D. Samples: Submit mortar color samples.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE1.06 MOCK-UP

A. Construct stone wall mock-up, 11 feet long by 10 feet wide, including stone anchor accessories, sill andhead flashings, window frame, corner condition, typical control joint.

B. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. During temporary storage on site, at the end of working day, and during rainy weather, cover stone workexposed to weather with non-staining waterproof coverings, securely anchored.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 STONE

A. Limestone: Indiana Oolitic Limestone; complying with ASTM C568/C568M Classification II - MediumDensity.1. Color: Buff.2. Grain Direction: Horizontal.3. Acceptable Producers:

a. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 04 4200 - 2 EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING

B. Sandstone: _________; complying with ASTM C616/C616M, Classification I - Sandstone.1. Surface Texture: Thermal cut.

2.02 MORTARA. Mortar: ASTM C270, Type N, Proportion specification, using Portland cement of white color.

2.03 ANCHORS AND ACCESSORIESA. Anchors and Other Components in Contact with Stone: Stainless steel, ASTM A666, Type 304.

1. Sizes and configurations: As required for vertical and horizontal support of stone and applicableloads.

B. Support Components not in Contact with Stone: Stainless steel, ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304.C. Setting Buttons and Shims: Lead type.D. Joint Sealant: ASTM C920 silicone sealant with movement capability of at least plus/minus 25 percent

and non-staining to stone when tested in accordance with ASTM C1248.E. Joint Backer Rod: ASTM C1330 open cell polyurethane of size 40 to 50 percent larger in diameter than

joint width.2.04 STONE FABRICATION

A. Fabricate units for uniform coloration between adjacent units and over the full area of the installation.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Set stone with a consistent joint width of 3/8 inch.B. Install anchors and place setting buttons to support stone and to establish joint dimensions.C. Joints in Exterior Work: Seal joints with joint sealant over backer rod, following sealant manufacturer's

instructions; tool sealant surface to concave profile.D. Joints in Interior Work: Leave perimeter joints and expansion joints open for sealant; fill other joints with

pointing mortar; pack and work into voids; tool surface to concave joint.3.02 CUTTING AND FITTING

A. Do not impair appearance or strength of stone work by cutting.END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 04 7200 - 1 CAST STONE MASONRY

SECTION 04 7200CAST STONE MASONRY


A. Architectural cast stone.B. Units required are:

1. Exterior wall units, including wall caps, coping, lintels, sills, and As Shown on drawings.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 04 0511 - Mortar and Masonry Grout: Mortar for setting cast stone.B. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints indicated to be left open for sealant.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2011.B. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement; 2015.C. ASTM A767/A767M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement; 2009.D. ASTM A884/A884M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire

Reinforcement; 2014.E. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement,

Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2015.F. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2013.G. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2015.H. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2014a.I. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2013.J. ASTM C1364 - Standard Specification for Architectural Cast Stone; 2010b.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 ARCHITECTURAL CAST STONE

A. Cast Stone: Architectural concrete product manufactured to simulate appearance of natural granite,complying with ASTM C1364.1. Compressive Strength: As specified in ASTM C1364; calculate strength of pieces to be field cut at

80 percent of uncut piece.2. Freeze-Thaw Resistance: Demonstrated by laboratory testing in accordance with ASTM C1364.3. Surface Texture: Fine grained texture, with no bugholes, air voids, or other surface blemishes

visible from distance of 20 feet.4. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.5. Remove cement film from exposed surfaces before packaging for shipment.

B. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated on drawings.1. Variation from Any Dimension, Including Bow, Camber, and Twist: Maximum of plus/minus 1/8

inch or length divided by 360, whichever is greater, but not more than 1/4 inch.2. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, provide:

a. Wash or slope of 1:12 on exterior horizontal surfaces.b. Drips on projecting components, wherever possible. c. Raised fillets at back of sills and at ends to be built in.

C. Reinforcement: Provide reinforcement as required to withstand handling and structural stresses;comply with ACI 318.

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 04 7200 - 2 CAST STONE MASONRY

2.02 MATERIALSA. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M.

1. For Mortar: Type I or II, except Type III may be used in cold weather.B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33/C33M, except for gradation; granite, quartz, or limestone.C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C33/C33M, except for gradation; natural or manufactured sands.D. Admixtures: ASTM C494/C494M.E. Water: Potable.F. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M deformed bars, galvanized.

1. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A767/A767M, Class I.G. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A1064/A1064M, galvanized or ASTM A884/A884M, epoxy

coated.H. Embedded Anchors, Dowels, and Inserts: Type 304 stainless steel, of type and size as required for

conditions.I. Mortar: Portland cement-lime, as specified in Section 04 0511; do not use masonry cement.J. Cleaner: General-purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar and grout stains, efflorescence, and

other construction stains from new masonry surfaces without discoloring or damaging masonrysurfaces; approved for intended use by cast stone manufacturer and by cleaner manufacturer for use oncast stone and adjacent masonry materials.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Mechanically anchor cast stone units indicated; set remainder in mortar.B. Setting:

1. Drench cast stone components with clear, running water immediately before installation.2. Set units in a full bed of mortar unless otherwise indicated.3. Fill vertical joints with mortar.4. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots completely with mortar or non-shrink grout.

C. Joints: Make all joints 3/8 inch, except as otherwise detailed.1. Rake mortar joints 3/4 inch for pointing. 2. Remove excess mortar from face of stone before pointing joints.3. Point joints with mortar in layers 3/8 inch thick and tool to a slight concave profile.4. Leave the following joints open for sealant:

a. Head joints in top courses, including copings, parapets, cornices, sills, and steps.b. Joints in projecting units.c. Joints between rigidly anchored units, including soffits, panels, and column covers.d. Joints below lugged sills and stair treads.e. Joints below ledge and relieving angles.f. Joints labeled "expansion joint".

D. Repairs: Repair chips and other surface damage noticeable when viewed in direct daylight at 20 feet.1. Repair with matching touchup material provided by the manufacturer and in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions.2. Repair methods and results subject to Architect 's approval.

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 05 5213 - 1 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

SECTION 05 5213PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS


A. Wall mounted handrails.B. Stair railings and guardrails.C. Free-standing railings at steps.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Weldedand Seamless; 2012.

B. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon SteelStructural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013.

C. ASTM E935 - Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Railsfor Buildings; 2013.

D. ASTM E985 - Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings; 2000(Reapproved 2006).

E. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer; 1999 (Ed. 2004).1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, anchorage, size and type of fasteners,

and accessories.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 RAILINGS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Design, fabricate, and test railing assemblies in accordance with the most stringent requirements ofASTM E985 and applicable local code.

B. Design railing assembly, wall rails, and attachments to resist lateral force of 75 lbs at any point withoutdamage or permanent set. Test in accordance with ASTM E 935.

C. Allow for expansion and contraction of members and building movement without damage to connectionsor members.

D. Dimensions: See drawings for configurations and heights.1. Top Rails: 1-1/2 inches square tube.2. Bottom Rails: 1-1/2 inches square tube.3. Handrails and Wall Rails: 1-1/2" diameter pipe.4. Posts: 1-1/2 inches square tube.5. Pickets: 3/4 inches square bar.

E. Provide anchors and other components as required to attach to structure, made of same materials asrailing components unless otherwise indicated; where exposed fasteners are unavoidable provide flushcountersunk fasteners.

F. Provide welding fittings to join lengths, seal open ends, and conceal exposed mounting bolts and nuts,including but not limited to elbows, T-shapes, splice connectors, flanges, escutcheons, and wallbrackets.

2.02 STEEL RAILING SYSTEMA. Steel Tube: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing.B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20E985




















15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 05 5213 - 2 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

C. Non-Weld Mechanical Fittings: Slip-on, galvanized malleable iron castings, for Schedule 40 pipe, withflush setscrews for tightening by standard hex wrench, no bolts or screw fasteners.

D. Welding Fittings: Factory- or shop-welded from matching pipe or tube; seams continuously welded;joints and seams ground smooth.

E. Exposed Fasteners: No exposed bolts or screws.F. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having

jurisdiction.2.03 FABRICATION

A. Accurately form components to suit specific project conditions and for proper connection to buildingstructure.

B. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes for delivery to site.C. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. Provide spigots and sleeves to

accommodate site assembly and installation.D. Welded Joints:

1. Exterior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by intermittent welds and plastic filler. Drillcondensate drainage holes at bottom of members at locations that will not encourage waterintrusion.

2. Interior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by intermittent welds and plastic filler.3. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight,

flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.B. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum surfaces that will be in contact with

cementitious or dissimilar materials.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects, with tight joints.B. Anchor railings securely to structure.

3.04 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per floor level, non-cumulative.B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch.

END OF SECTION





































15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 06 1324 - 1 HEAVY TIMBER FRAMING

SECTION 06 1324HEAVY TIMBER FRAMING


A. Heavy structural timber for posts, beams, joists, purlins, and balconies.1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and SteelProducts; 2015.

B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware;2009.

C. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood-Preservers'Association; 2012.

D. RIS (GR) - Standard Specifications for Grades of California Redwood Lumber; Redwood InspectionService; 2000.


PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 WOOD MATERIALS

A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.B. Lumber Grading Rules: RIS (GR).

2.02 ACCESSORIESA. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, and Screws, Untreated Wood: Medium carbon steel; galvanized coating

per ASTM A153/A153M; size and type to suit application.B. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, and Screws, Preservative-Treated Wood: Stainless steel; size and type to

suit application.2.03 WOOD TREATMENT

A. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA Standard U1, Use Category UC3B, CommoditySpecification A, using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft retention.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 ERECTION

A. Set structural members level and plumb, in correct position.B. Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe,

plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.C. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect.

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 06 1500 - 1 WOOD DECKING

SECTION 06 1500WOOD DECKING


A. Softwood lumber structural wood decking.B. Plywood structural wood decking.C. Preservative treatment of wood.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2012.B. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Designer Qualifications: Design decking under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer

experienced in design of work of this type and licensed in Tennessee.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Plywood Decking:1. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Composite Wood Decking:1. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 WOOD MATERIALSA. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.B. Plywood Decking: PS 1 veneer plywood; APA Rated Sheathing, Span Rating ____; Exterior grade;1 A

interior veneer appearance grade; sanded.2.03 WOOD TREATMENT

A. Factory-Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category Systemfor wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specificapplications.

B. Preservative Pressure Treatment:1. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Decking: AWPA U1, Use Category UC3B,

Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft retention.a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION - PLYWOOD DECKING

A. Install decking perpendicular to framing members with ends staggered over firm bearing. On slopedsurfaces, lay decking with tongue upward.

B. Engage plywood tongue and groove edges.C. Allow expansion space at edges and ends.

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 06 2000 - 1 FINISH CARPENTRY

SECTION 06 2000FINISH CARPENTRY


A. Finish carpentry items.B. Wood door frames, glazed frames.C. Wood casings and moldings.D. Hardware and attachment accessories.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014.B. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; 2010.C. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Protect work from moisture damage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS

A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI/AWMAC/WI(AWS) for Custom Grade.

B. Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI Architectural Woodwork QualityStandards Illustrated for grades as indicated.

2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTSA. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.

2.03 SHEET MATERIALSA. Softwood Plywood, Exposed to View: Face species as indicated, plain sawn, medium density fiberboard

core; PS 1 Grade A-B, glue type as recommended for application.2.04 HARDWARE

A. Hardware: Comply with BHMA A156.9.2.05 FABRICATION

A. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings.B. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim

for scribing and site cutting.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) requirements for grade indicated.B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.C. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use

additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.3.02 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING

A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth.3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch.

http://www.awinet.org/
























15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 06 2000 - 2 FINISH CARPENTRY

B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch.END OF SECTION




15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 06 4100 - 1 ARCHITECTURAL WOODCASEWORK

SECTION 06 4100ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK


A. Specially fabricated cabinet units.B. Cabinet hardware.C. Factory finishing.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 12 3600 - Countertops.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details,

fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes.C. Samples: Submit actual samples of architectural cabinet construction, minimum 12 inches square,

illustrating proposed cabinet, countertop, and shelf unit substrate and finish.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. __________.B. Substitutions: Not permitted.

2.02 CABINETSA. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI//AWMAC/WI

(AWS) for Custom Grade.2.03 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS

A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.2.04 COUNTERTOPS

A. Plastic Laminate Countertops: Medium density fiberboard substrate covered with HPDL, conventionallyfabricated and self-edge banded.

2.05 HARDWAREA. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, steel with chrome finish, 4 inch centers.

2.06 FACTORY FINISHINGPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level.B. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use

additional overlay trim for this purpose.C. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with wood putty color of species to

match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces.

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 06 4100 - 2 ARCHITECTURAL WOODCASEWORK

3.03 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust installed work.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 07 1300 - 1 SHEET WATERPROOFING

SECTION 07 1300SHEET WATERPROOFING


A. Sheet membrane waterproofing.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete substrate.B. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Metal parapet, coping, and counterflashing.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers--Tension;

2006a (Reapproved 2013).B. ASTM D570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics; 1998 (Reapproved 2010).C. ASTM D882 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting; 2012.D. ASTM D903 - Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds; 1998

(Reapproved 2010).E. ASTM D1876 - Standard Test Method for Peel Resistance of Adhesives (T-Peel Test) ; 2008.F. ASTM D1970/D1970M - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet

Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2013.G. ASTM D5295/D5295M - Standard Guide for Preparation of Concrete Surfaces for Adhered (Bonded)

Membrane Waterproofing Systems; 2014.H. ASTM D5385/D5385M - Standard Test Method for Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance of Waterproofing

Membranes; 1993 (Reapproved 2014).I. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014.J. ASTM E154/E154M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth

Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover; 2008a (Reapproved 2013).1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data for membrane.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate special joint or termination conditions and conditions of interface with other

materials.1.05 MOCK-UP

A. Construct mock-up 100 sq ft of horizontal waterproofed panel; to represent finished work includinginternal and external corners.

B. Locate where directed.C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before and during application and until

liquid or mastic accessories have cured.1.07 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for waterproofing failing to resist penetration of water and

____________, except where such failures are the result of structural failures of building. Hairlinecracking of concrete due to temperature change or shrinkage is not considered a structural failure.


PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 WATERPROOFING APPLICATIONS

A. Self-Adhered Modified Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing: Use at Below Grade Retaining Walls.1. Cover with protection board.

2.02 MEMBRANE MATERIALSA. Self-Adhered Modified Bituminous Membrane:

1. Thickness: 60 mil (0.060 inch).2. Tensile Strength:

a. Film: 5000 pounds per square inch, minimum, measured according to ASTM D882 and atgrip-separation rate of 2 inches per minute.

b. Membrane: 325 pounds per square inch, minimum, measured according to ASTM D412Method A, using die C and at spindle-separation rate of 2 inches per minute.

3. Elongation at Break: 300 percent, minimum, measured according to ASTM D412.4. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perm, maximum, measured in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.5. Low Temperature Flexibility: Unaffected when tested according to ASTM D1970/D1970M at minus

20 degrees F, 180 degree bend on 1 inch mandrel.6. Peel Strength: 7 pounds per inch, minimum, when tested according to ASTM D903.7. Lap Adhesion Strength: 5 pounds per inch, minimum, when tested according to ASTM D1876.8. Puncture Resistance: 50 pounds, minimum, measured in accordance with ASTM E154/E154M.9. Water Absorption: 0.1 percent increase in weight, maximum, measured in accordance with ASTM

D570, 24 hour immersion.10. Hydrostatic Resistance: Resists the weight of 200 feet when tested according to ASTM

D5385/D5385M.11. Adhesives, Sealants, Tapes, and Accessories: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.12. Manufacturers:

a. GCP Applied Technologies; ____: www.gcpat.com/sle.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Drainage Panel: Drainage layer with geotextile filter fabric on earth side.

1. Composition: Dimpled polystyrene core; polypropylene filter fabric.a. Products:

1) Grace Co.; Hydroduct® 225 .2) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Flexible Flashings: Type recommended by membrane manufacturer.C. Counterflashings: ____ as specified in Section 07 6200.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify substrate surfaces are durable; free of matter detrimental to adhesion or application of

waterproofing system.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive waterproofing.B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Vacuum substrate clean.C. Surfaces for Adhesive Bonding: Apply surface conditioner at a rate recommended by manufacturer.

Protect conditioner from rain or frost until dry.D. Concrete Surfaces for Adhesive Bonding: Prepare concrete substrate according to ASTM

D5295/D5295M.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20D570


http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20D5385/D5385M



























1. Remove substances that inhibit adhesion including form release agents, curing compoundsadmixtures, laitance, moisture, dust, dirt, grease and oil.

2. Repair surface defects including honeycombs, fins, tie holes, bug holes, sharp offsets, ruttedcracks, ragged corners, deviations in surface plane, spalling and delaminations, as described inthe reference standard.

3. Remove and replace areas of defective concrete as specified in Section 03 3000.4. Prepare concrete for adhesive bonded waterproofing using mechanical or chemical methods

described in the referenced standard.5. Test concrete surfaces as described in the referenced standards. Verify surfaces are ready to

receive adhesive bonded waterproofing membrane system.3.03 INSTALLATION - MEMBRANE

A. Install membrane waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Roll out membrane. Minimize wrinkles and bubbles.C. Self-Adhering Membrane: Remove release paper layer. Roll out on substrate with a mechanical roller to

encourage full contact bond.D. Overlap edges and ends and seal by method recommended by manufacturer, minimum 3 inches. Seal

permanently waterproof. Apply uniform bead of sealant to joint edge.E. Reinforce membrane with multiple thickness of membrane material over joints, whether joints are static

or dynamic.F. Weather lap joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage. Seal joints and seams.G. Install flexible flashings. Seal items penetrating through membrane with flexible flashings. Seal

watertight to membrane.H. Seal membrane and flashings to adjoining surfaces. Install termination bar at all edges. Install

counterflashing over all exposed edges.3.04 INSTALLATION - DRAINAGE PANEL AND PROTECTION BOARD

A. Place drainage panel directly against membrane, butt joints, place to encourage drainage downward. Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions.

B. Adhere protection board to substrate with compatible adhesive.3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner will provide testing services in accordance with Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements. Contractor shall provide temporary construction and materials for testing.

B. On completion of horizontal membrane installation, dam installation area in preparation for flood testing.C. Flood to minimum depth of 1 inch with clean water. After 48 hours, inspect for leaks.D. If leaking is found, remove water, repair leaking areas with new waterproofing materials as directed by

Architect; repeat flood test. Repair damage to building.E. When area is proven watertight, drain water and remove dam.

3.06 PROTECTIONA. Do not permit traffic over unprotected or uncovered membrane.

3.07 SCHEDULEA. Foundation Wall: Two ply of CPE membrane waterproofing; three plies at inside corners; adhesive

applied.END OF SECTION












































15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 07 2126 - 1 BLOWN INSULATION

SECTION 07 2126BLOWN INSULATION


A. Exterior Walls: Loose insulation pneumatically placed and poured into wall spaces through accessholes.

B. Ceiling: Loose insulation pneumatically placed and poured into joist spaces through access holes.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM C739 - Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber (Wood-Base) Loose-Fill Thermal Insulation;2011.

B. ASTM C1015 - Standard Practice for Installation of Cellulosic and Mineral Fiber Loose-Fill ThermalInsulation; 2006 (Reapproved 2011).

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONA. Materials of This Section: Provide continuity of thermal barrier at building enclosure elements, in

conjunction with Section 07 2100.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Blown Insulation:1. CertainTeed Corporation; _____: www.certainteed.com.2. GreenFiber; _____: www.greenfiber.com.3. Johns Manville; _____: www.jm.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 MATERIALSA. Loose Fill Insulation: ASTM C739, cellulose fiber type, nodulated for pour and bulk for pneumatic

placement.B. Ventilation Baffles: Formed plastic.


A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation are dry and ready to receive insulation.B. Verify that light fixtures have thermal cut-out device to restrict over-heating in soffit or ceiling spaces.C. Verify spaces are unobstructed to allow placement of insulation.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install insulation and ventilation baffle in accordance with ASTM C1015 and manufacturer's instructions.B. Place insulation pneumatically to completely fill stud, joist, and rafter spaces.C. Place insulation against baffles. Do not impede natural attic ventilation to soffit.D. Completely fill intended spaces. Leave no gaps or voids.

3.03 CLEANINGA. Remove loose insulation residue.

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 07 2126 - 2 BLOWN INSULATION

3.04 SCHEDULESA. Attic Spaces: Pour insulation between ceiling joists to achieve an R-value of 19.

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 07 2500 - 1 WEATHER BARRIERS

SECTION 07 2500WEATHER BARRIERS


A. Air Barriers: Materials that form a system to stop passage of air through exterior walls, joints betweenexterior walls and roof, joints around frames of openings in exterior walls, and ____.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Vapor retarder under concrete slabs on grade.B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Water-resistive barrier under exterior cladding.

1.03 DEFINITIONSA. Weather Barrier: Assemblies that form either water-resistive barriers, air barriers, or vapor retarders.B. Air Barrier: Air tight barrier made of material that is relatively air impermeable but water vapor

permeable, both to the degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces. Note: For the purposes of this specification, vapor impermeable air barriers are classified as vaporretarders.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2015a.B. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014.C. ASTM E2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials; 2013.D. ICC-ES AC38 - Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Barriers; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc; 2013.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 WEATHER BARRIER ASSEMBLIES

A. Water-Resistive Barrier: Provide on exterior walls under exterior cladding. 1. Under Portland cement stucco, use two separate layers of building paper.

B. Air Barrier:2.02 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER MATERIALS (NEITHER AIR BARRIER NOR VAPOR RETARDER)

A. Building Paper: Asphalt-saturated Kraft building paper complying with requirements of ICC-ES AC38Grade D.

2.03 AIR BARRIER MATERIALS (WATER VAPOR PERMEABLE AND WATER-RESISTIVE)A. Air Barrier Sheet, Mechanically Fastened:

1. Air Permeance: 0.004 cubic feet per minute per square foot, maximum, when tested inaccordance with ASTM E2178.

2. Water Vapor Permeance: 5 perms, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96MProcedure A (desiccant method).

3. Ultraviolet and Weathering Resistance: Approved in writing by manufacturer for minimum of 9months weather exposure.

4. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, and smoke developed index of50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

5. Seam and Perimeter Tape: Polyethylene self adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inches wide,compatible with sheet material; unless otherwise specified.

6. Products:a. DuPont Building Innovations; Tyvek Commercial Wrap with Tyvek Fluid Applied Flashing -

Brush Formulation, Tyvek Fluid Applied Flashing and Joint Compound, FlexWrap NF,StraightFlash, StraightFlash VF, Tyvek Wrap Caps, and Tyvek Tape: www.dupont.com.

b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 07 2500 - 2 WEATHER BARRIERS


A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Water-Resistive Barriers: Install continuous barrier over surfaces indicated, with sheets lapped to shed

water but with seams not sealed.C. Air Barriers: Install continuous air tight barrier over surfaces indicated, with sealed seams and with

sealed joints to adjacent surfaces.D. Mechanically Fastened Sheets - On Exterior:

1. Install sheets shingle-fashion to shed water, with seams generally horizontal.2. Overlap seams as recommended by manufacturer but at least 6 inches. 3. Overlap at outside and inside corners as recommended by manufacturer but at least 12 inches.4. For applications specified to be air tight, seal seams, laps, penetrations, tears, and cuts with

self-adhesive tape; use only large-headed, gasketed fasteners recommended by the manufacturer.5. Install water-resistive barrier over jamb flashings.6. Install air barrier and vapor retarder UNDER jamb flashings.7. Install head flashings under weather barrier.8. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, wrap excess sheet into opening; at

head, seal sheet over flange and flashing.E. Openings and Penetrations in Exterior Weather Barriers:

1. Install flashing over sills, covering entire sill frame member, extending at least 5 inches ontoweather barrier and at least 6 inches up jambs; mechanically fasten stretched edges.

2. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, seal head and jamb flanges using acontinuous bead of sealant compressed by flange and cover flanges with at least 4 inches wide; donot seal sill flange.

3. At openings to be filled with non-flanged frames, seal weather barrier to all sides of openingframing, using flashing at least 6 inches wide, covering entire depth of framing.

4. At head of openings, install flashing under weather barrier extending at least 2 inches beyond faceof jambs; seal weather barrier to flashing.

5. At interior face of openings, seal gap between window/door frame and rough framing, using jointsealant over backer rod.

6. Service and Other Penetrations: Form flashing around penetrating item and seal to weatherbarrier surface.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Do not cover installed weather barriers until required inspections have been completed.B. Take digital photographs of each portion of the installation prior to covering up.

3.03 PROTECTIONA. Do not leave materials exposed to weather longer than recommended by manufacturer.B. Do not leave paper- or felt-based barriers exposed to weather for longer than one week.

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 07 3113 - 1 ASPHALT SHINGLES

SECTION 07 3113ASPHALT SHINGLES


A. Asphalt shingle roofing.B. Flexible sheet membranes for eave protection, underlayment, and valley protection.C. Associated metal flashings and accessories.D. Ridge vents.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 7123 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM D3161 - Standard Test Method for Wind-Resistance of Steep Slope Roofing Products

(Fan-Induced Method); 2014.B. ASTM D3462 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles Made From Glass Felt and Surfaced with

Mineral Granules; 2010a.C. ASTM D6380/D6380M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roll Roofing (Organic Felt); 2003

(Reapproved 2013).D. NRCA MS104 - The NRCA Roofing Manual: Steep-slope Roof Systems; 2013.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Samples: Submit two samples of each shingle color indicating color range and finish texture/pattern; for

color selection.C. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Shingles: 200 sq ft of each type and color.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Perform Work in accordance with the recommendations of NRCA Steep Roofing Manual.

1.06 WARRANTYA. Provide manufacturer's standard 30-year minimum warranty.

1.07 MOCK-UPA. Provide mock-up of 100 sq ft, including underlayment.B. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SHINGLES

A. Manufacturers:1. GAF Materials Corporation; Product Royal Soverign 25yr: www.gaf.com.2. Tamko Building Products; Product "Elite Glass Seal 25yr": www.tamko.com3. Certainteed Roofing; Product "XT-25 3 tab traditional": www.certainteed.com4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Asphalt Shingles: Asphalt-coated glass felt, mineral granule surfaced, complying with ASTMD3462/D3642M; Class A fire resistance.1. Wind Resistance: Class F, 110 mph, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3161.2. Warranted Wind Speed: Not less than tested wind resistance.3. Algae Resistant.4. Weight: Approx. 235 lb/100 sq ft.







5. Self-sealing type.6. Style: Square.7. Weather exposure: 8 inches.8. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

2.02 SHEET MATERIALSA. Smooth Surfaced Roll Roofing: Asphalt-coated organic felt, with smooth asphalt coating both sides,

complying with ASTM D6380/D6380M, Class S, Type III, 51.1 lb/100 sq ft.2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Nails: Standard round wire shingle type, of hot-dipped zinc coated steel, 10 wire gage, 0.1019 inchshank diameter, 3/8 inch head diameter, of sufficient length to penetrate through roof sheathing or 3/4inch into roof sheathing or decking.

2.04 METAL FLASHINGSA. Metal Flashings: Provide sheet metal eave edge, gable edge, ridge, ridge vents, open valley flashing,

chimney flashing, dormer flashing, and other flashing indicated.1. Form flashings to protect roofing materials from physical damage and shed water.2. Form sections square and accurate to profile, in maximum possible lengths, free from distortion or

defects detrimental to appearance or performance.3. Hem exposed edges of flashings minimum 1/2 inch on underside.4. Coat concealed surfaces of flashings with bituminous paint.

B. Steel Sheet Metal: Prefinished and galvanized steel sheet, 26 gage, 0.0179 inch minimum thickness,G90/Z275 hot-dipped galvanized; PVC coated, _____ color.

2.05 RIDGE VENTSA. Ridge Vents: Provide polypropylene shingle-over ridge vents, in 4-foot lengths, complete with end caps,

and other accessories required for a complete installation.1. Acceptable products:

a. V-400E Ridge Ventilation System by Core-A-Vent.b. Or Approved Equal.


A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.B. Verify that roof penetrations and plumbing stacks are in place and flashed to deck surface.C. Verify deck surfaces are dry, free of ridges, warps, or voids.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Seal roof deck joints wider than 1/16 inch as recommended by shingle manufacturer.

3.03 INSTALLATION - EAVE PROTECTION MEMBRANEA. Install eave protection membrane from eave edge to minimum 4 ft up-slope beyond interior face of

exterior wall.B. Install eave protection membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.04 INSTALLATION - UNDERLAYMENTA. At Roof Slopes of 4:12: Install two layers of underlayment over entire roof area, with ends and edges

weather lapped minimum 4 inches. Stagger end laps of each consecutive layer. Nail in place.B. Underlayment At Roof Slopes Greater Than 4:12: Install underlayment perpendicular to slope of roof,

with ends and edges weather lapped minimum 4 inches. Stagger end laps of each consecutive layer. Nail in place. Weather lap minimum 4 inches over eave protection.

C. Items projecting through or mounted on roof: Weather lap and seal watertight with plastic cement.3.05 INSTALLATION - VALLEY PROTECTION

A. Install one ply of smooth surfaced roll roofing, minimum 18 inches wide, centered over valleys.


















































B. Weather lap joints minimum 2 inches.C. Nail in place minimum 18 inches on center, 1 inch from edges.

3.06 INSTALLATION - METAL FLASHING AND ACCESSORIESA. Weather lap joints minimum 2 inches and seal weather tight with plastic cement.B. Secure in place with nails at 12 inches on center. Conceal fastenings.C. Items Projecting Through or Mounted on Roofing: Flash and seal weather tight with plastic cement.

3.07 INSTALLATION - SHINGLESA. Install shingles in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Fasten individual shingles using 2 nails per shingle, or as required by code, whichever is greater.2. Fasten strip shingles using 4 nails per strip, or as required by code, whichever is greater.

B. Place shingles in straight coursing pattern with 8 inch weather exposure to produce double thicknessover full roof area. Provide double course of shingles at eaves.

C. Project first course of shingles 3/4 inch beyond fascia boards.D. Extend shingles 1/2 inch beyond face of gable edge fascia boards.E. Complete installation to provide weather tight service.

3.08 INSTALLATION - RIDGE VENTSA. Install ridge vents in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

END OF SECTION




















15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 07 4646 - 1 FIBER CEMENT SIDING

SECTION 07 4646FIBER CEMENT SIDING


A. Wood-fiber cement siding.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Siding substrate.B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Siding substrate.C. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Water-resistive barrier under siding.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C1186 - Standard Specification for Flat Fiber Cement Sheets; 2008 (Reapproved 2012).

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Manufacturer's requirements for related materials to be installed by others.2. Preparation instructions and recommendations.3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.4. Installation methods, including nail patterns.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section

with minimum 3 years of experience.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products under waterproof cover and elevated above grade, on a flat surface.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SIDING

A. Panel Siding: Vertically oriented panels made of cement and cellulose fiber formed under high pressurewith integral surface texture, complying with ASTM C1186 Type A Grade II; with machined edges, fornail attachment.1. Texture: Smooth.2. Length (Height): 96 inches, nominal.3. Width: 48 inches.4. Thickness: 5/16 inch, nominal.5. Finish: Unfinished.6. Warranty: 50 year limited; transferable.7. Panel Siding Manufacturers:

a. James Hardie Building Products, Inc: www.jameshardie.com.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Soffit Panels: Panels made of cement and cellulose fiber formed under high pressure with integralsurface texture, complying with ASTM C1186 Type A Grade II; with machined edges, for nailattachment.1. Texture: Smooth.2. Length: 96 inches, nominal.3. Width: 48 inches.4. Thickness: 5/16 inch, nominal.5. Finish: Unfinished.6. Manufacturer: Same as siding.

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 07 4646 - 2 FIBER CEMENT SIDING

2.02 ACCESSORIESA. Trim: Same material and texture as siding.B. Fasteners: Galvanized or corrosion resistant; length as required to penetrate minimum 1-1/4 inch.

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 07 6200 - 1 SHEET METAL FLASHING ANDTRIM

SECTION 07 6200SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM


A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, gutters, and downspouts.B. Sealants for joints within sheet metal fabrications.


A. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for PigmentedOrganic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix); 2015.

B. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for SuperiorPerforming Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.

C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-IronAlloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.

D. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.E. ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2007

(Reapproved 2012).F. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; 2012.


1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA (ASMM) and CDA A4050 requirements and standard

details, except as otherwise indicated.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheetsto ensure drainage.

B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SHEET MATERIALS

A. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 24 gage(0.0239) inch thick base metal, shop pre-coated with PVDF coating.1. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2605;

multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system.2. Modified Silicone Polyester Coating: Pigmented Organic Coating System, AAMA 2603; baked

enamel finish system; color as scheduled.2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers.B. Primer: Zinc chromate type.C. Sealant to be Concealed in Completed Work: Non-curing butyl sealant.D. Sealant to be Exposed in Completed Work: ASTM C920; elastomeric sealant, 100 percent silicone with

minimum movement capability of plus/minus 25 percent and recommended by manufacturer forsubstrates to be sealed; clear.

E. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I.2.03 FABRICATION

A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 07 6200 - 2 SHEET METAL FLASHING ANDTRIM

B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners.D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed

lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant.F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form drip.

2.04 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATIONA. As specified in Section 07631 - Gutters And Downspouts.B. Gutters: SMACNA (ASMM), Rectangular profile.C. Downspouts: Round profile.D. Gutters and Downspouts: Size for rainfall intensity determined by a storm occurrence of 1 in 10 years in

accordance with SMACNA (ASMM).E. Accessories: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts.

1. Anchorage Devices: In accordance with SMACNA requirements.2. Gutter Supports: Straps or brackets.3. Downspout Supports: Brackets.


A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets inplace, and nailing strips located.

B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted.B. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.C. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines

accurate to profiles.D. Seal metal joints watertight.E. Secure gutters and downspouts in place using concealed fasteners.F. Slope gutters 1/8 inch per foot minimum.G. Connect downspouts to storm sewer system where called for. Grout connection watertight.H. At other locations, set splash pads under downspouts.

3.03 SCHEDULEA. Gutters and Downspouts:B. Sheet Metal Roof Expansion Joint Covers, and Roof-to-Wall Joint Covers:C. Counterflashings at Roofing Terminations (over roofing base flashings):

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 07 7123 - 1 MANUFACTURED GUTTERSAND DOWNSPOUTS

SECTION 07 7123MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS


A. Pre-finished aluminum gutters and downspouts.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.B. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric];

2014.C. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; 2012.

1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTSA. Conform to SMACNA (ASMM) for sizing components for rainfall intensity determined by a storm

occurrence of 1 in 5 years.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope to drain.B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration, staining, or damage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Gutters and Downspouts:1. ATAS International, Inc; ____: www.atas.com.2. ______.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 MATERIALSA. Pre-Finished Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M); 0.032 inch thick.

1. Finish: Plain, shop pre-coated with modified silicone coating.2. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.

2.03 COMPONENTSA. Gutters: SMACNA semi-circular style profile.B. Downspouts: SMACNA Round profile.C. Anchors and Supports: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts.

1. Gutter Supports: Brackets.2. Downspout Supports: Straps.

D. Fasteners: Same material and finish as gutters and downspouts .2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Downspout Boots: Cast iron; ASTM A48.2.05 FABRICATION

A. Form gutters and downspouts of profiles and size indicated.B. Fabricate with required connection pieces.C. Form sections square, true, and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths, free of distortion or

defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Allow for expansion at joints.

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 07 7123 - 2 MANUFACTURED GUTTERSAND DOWNSPOUTS

D. Hem exposed edges of metal.E. Fabricate gutter and downspout accessories; seal watertight.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Paint concealed metal surfaces and surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals with protective backing

paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install gutters, downspouts, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Connect downspouts to storm sewer system. Seal connection watertight.

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 07 7200 - 1 ROOF ACCESSORIES

SECTION 07 7200ROOF ACCESSORIES


A. Snow guards.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 07 3113 - Asphalt Shingles.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.PART 2 PRODUCTSPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in manner that maintains roofing weather integrity.END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 07 8400 - 1 FIRESTOPPING

SECTION 07 8400FIRESTOPPING


A. Firestopping systems.B. Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire resistance rated and smoke resistant assemblies,

whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum wallboard fireproofing.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops; 2013a.B. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint Systems; 2007 (Reapproved 2011).C. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition.D. FA (AG) - FM Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition.E. UL 2079 - Standard for Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems; Current Edition, Including

All Revisions.F. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition.


1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduled fire ratings when

tested in accordance with methods indicated.1. Listing in the current-year classification or certification books of UL, FM, or ITS (Warnock Hersey)

will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report.1.06 MOCK-UP

A. Install one firestopping assembly representative of each fire rating design required on project.1. Where one design may be used for different penetrating items or in different wall constructions,

install one assembly for each different combination.B. Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ) before proceeding.C. If accepted, mock-up will represent minimum standard for the Work.D. If accepted, mock-up may remain as part of the Work. Remove and replace mock-ups not accepted.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions during and

after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after installation ofmaterials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 FIRESTOPPING - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for testedassembly design.

B. Fire Ratings: Refer to drawings for required systems and ratings.2.02 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTS

A. Floor-to-Floor, Wall-to-Wall, and Wall-to-Floor Joints, Except Perimeter, Where Both Are Fire-Rated: Use any system that has been tested according to ASTM E1966 or UL 2079 to have fire resistance FRating equal to required fire rating of the assembly in which the joint occurs.


B. Through Penetration Firestopping: Use any system that has been tested according to ASTM E814 tohave fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of penetrated assembly.

2.03 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMSA. Firestopping at Uninsulated Metallic Pipe and Conduit Penetrations, of diameter 4 inches or less: Caulk

or putty.B. Firestopping at Combustible Pipe and Conduit Penetrations, of diameter 4 inches or less: Any material

meeting requirements.C. Firestopping at Cable Tray Penetrations: Any material meeting requirements.D. Firestopping at Cable Penetrations, not in Conduit or Cable Tray: Caulk or putty.E. Firestopping at Control Joints (without Penetrations): Any material meeting requirements.

1. Between Top of Fire-Rated Walls and Bottom of Slab Above: UL Design No. ____, F Rating 1-1/2hour.

2.04 MATERIALSA. Elastomeric Silicone Firestopping: Single component silicone elastomeric compound and compatible

silicone sealant; conforming to the following:1. Durability and Longevity: Permanent.2. Color: Black, dark gray, or red.3. Manufacturers:

a. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc: www.adfire.com.b. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop.c. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com.d. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com.e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Foam Firestoppping: Single component silicone foam compound; conforming to the following:1. Durability and Longevity: Permanent.2. Color: Dark grey.3. Manufacturers:

a. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop.b. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com.c. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Fiber Firestopping: Mineral fiber insulation used in conjunction with elastomeric surface sealer formingairtight bond to opening; conforming to the following:1. Durability and Longevity: Permanent.2. Manufacturers:

a. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc: www.adfire.com.b. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

D. Firestop Devices - Wrap Type: Mechanical device with incombustible filler and sheet stainless steeljacket, intended to be installed after penetrating item has been installed; conforming to the following:1. Durability and Longevity: Permanent; suitable for pedestrian traffic.2. Manufacturers:

a. Grace Construction Products: www.na.graceconstruction.com.b. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop.c. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com.d. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com.e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

E. Intumescent Putty: Compound that expands on exposure to surface heat gain; conforming to thefollowing:1. Potential Expansion: Minimum 1000 percent.


2. Durability and Longevity: Permanent.3. Color: Black, dark gray, or red.4. Manufacturers:

a. Grace Construction Products: www.na.graceconstruction.com.b. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop.c. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com.d. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com.e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

F. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for testedassembly design.


A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter that could adverselyaffect bond of firestopping material.

B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions, completely closing openings.

B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authorities having jurisdiction.C. Install labeling required by code.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 07 9005 - 1 D TO JOINT SEALERS

SECTION 07 9005D TO JOINT SEALERS


A. Sealants and joint backing.B. Hollow gaskets.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2014.B. ASTM C919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2012.C. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.D. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013.E. ASTM D2628 - Standard Specification for Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Joint Seals for

Concrete Pavements; 1991 (Reapproved 2011).1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE1.05 MOCK-UP

A. Construct mock-up with specified sealant types and with other components noted.B. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after

installation.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Silicone Sealants:1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.

2.02 SEALANTSA. General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25 minimum; Uses M,

G, and A; single component.1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces.2. Applications: Use for:

a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry.b. Joints between concrete and other materials.c. Joints between metal frames and other materials.d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated.

B. Type II - Exterior Expansion Joint Sealer: ASTM D2628, hollow neoprene (polychloroprene)compression gasket.1. Black color.

C. Type III - Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: Butyl or polyisobutylene, nondrying, nonskinning, noncuring.1. Applications: Use for:

a. Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work.b. Concealed sealant bead in siding overlaps.

D. Type IV - General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade NFsingle component, paintable.1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces.2. Applications: Use for:


a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints.b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces.c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.

E. Type V - Bathtub/Tile Sealant: White or clear silicone; ASTM C 920, Uses I, M and A; singlecomponent, mildew resistant.1. Applications: Use for:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces.b. Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces.

F. Type VI - Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Locations:1. Applications: Use for concealed locations only:

a. Sealant bead between top stud runner and structure and between bottom stud track and floor.G. Type VII - Concrete Paving Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C920, Class 25, Uses T, I,

M and A; single component.1. Color: Gray.2. Applications: Use for:

a. Joints in sidewalks and vehicular paving.2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.B. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30

to 50 percent larger than joint width.C. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.


A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and

material installation instructions.B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919.D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when

sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.G. Tool joints concave.H. Compression Gaskets: Avoid joints except at ends, corners, and intersections; seal all joints with

adhesive; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface.3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.


3.05 PROTECTIONA. Protect sealants until cured.

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 08 1113 - 1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS ANDFRAMES

SECTION 08 1113HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES


A. Non-fire-rated hollow metal doors and frames.B. Fire-rated hollow metal doors and frames.C. Thermally insulated hollow metal doors with frames.D. Hollow metal borrowed lites glazing frames.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.B. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.B. ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors,

Frames and Frame Anchors; 2011.C. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (SDI-100); 2014.D. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel

Doors and Frames; 2011.E. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron

Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.F. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,

High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, andBake Hardenable; 2015.

G. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-HighStrength; 2014.

H. BHMA A156.115 - American National Standard for Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and SteelFrames; 2014.

I. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2009.J. NAAMM HMMA 830 - Hardware Selection for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2002.K. NAAMM HMMA 831 - Hardware Locations for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2011.L. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and

Frames; 2007.M. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2016.N. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.O. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type

and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referencedstandards/guidelines.

C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and any indicatedfinish requirements.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements.


1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Comply with NAAMM HMMA 840 or ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance with specified

requirements.B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion and adverse

effects on factory applied painted finish.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames:1. Ceco Door, an Assa Abloy Group company; _____: www.assaabloydss.com.2. De La Fontaine Inc; Hollow Metal Door Model _____: www.delafontaine.com.3. De La Fontaine Inc; Windstorm-Resistant Steel Door and Frame; door style ____:

www.delafontaine.com.4. De La Fontaine Inc; Hollow Metal Frame ____ Profile: www.delafontaine.com.5. Republic Doors; ____: www.republicdoor.com.6. Steelcraft, an Allegion brand; ____: www.allegion.com/us.7. Technical Glass Products; SteelBuilt Window & Door Systems: www.tgpamerica.com.8. Steelcraft; Product ____: www.steelcraft.com.9. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 DESIGN CRITERIAA. Requirements for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames:

1. Steel used for fabrication of doors and frames shall comply with one or more of the followingrequirements; Galvannealed steel conforming to ASTM A653/A653M, cold-rolled steel conformingto ASTM A1008/A1008M, or hot-rolled pickled and oiled (HRPO) steel conforming to ASTMA1011/A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS) Type B for each.

2. Accessibility: Comply with ICC A117.1 and ADA Standards.3. Exterior Door Top Closures: Flush end closure channel, with top and door faces aligned.4. Door Edge Profile: Manufacturers standard for application indicated.5. Typical Door Face Sheets: Flush. 6. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated on

drawings. Style: Manufacturers standard.7. Hardware Preparations, Selections and Locations: Comply with NAAMM HMMA 830 and NAAMM

HMMA 831 or BHMA A156.115 and ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance with specifiedrequirements.

8. Zinc Coating for Typical Interior and/or Exterior Locations: Provide metal components zinc-coated(galvanized) and/or zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) by the hot-dip process in accordance withASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness, unless noted otherwise forspecific hollow metal doors and frames.a. Based on SDI Standards: Provide at least A40/ZF120 (galvannealed) when necessary,

coating not required for typical interior door applications, and at least A60/ZF180(galvannealed) for corrosive locations.

9. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one

type of requirement, comply with the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior doorthat is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exteriordoors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent.

2.03 HOLLOW METAL DOORSA. Type ___, Exterior Doors: Thermally insulated.

1. Based on SDI Standards: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100).a. Level 1 - Standard-duty.b. Physical Performance Level C, 250,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4.c. Model 1 - Full Flush.

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20A1011/A1011M








http://www.naamm.org/





















d. Door Face Metal Thickness: 20 gage, 0.032 inch, minimum.2. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inch, nominal.3. Galvanizing: Components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with

ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness.4. Door Face Sheets: Flush.5. Weatherstripping: Refer to Section 08 7100.

B. Type ___, Interior Doors, Non-Fire Rated:1. Based on SDI Standards: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100).

a. Level 1 - Standard-duty.b. Physical Performance Level C, 250,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4.c. Model 1 - Full Flush.d. Door Face Metal Thickness: 20 gage, 0.032 inch, minimum.

2. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inch, nominal.2.04 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. Comply with standards and/or custom guidelines as indicated for corresponding door in accordance withapplicable door frame requirements.

B. General:1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door.2. Finish: Same as for door.

C. Exterior Door Frames: Knock-down type.1. Galvanizing: Components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with

ASTM A653/A653M, with A40/ZF120 coating.2. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100.

D. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire Rated: Full profile/continuously welded type.E. Door Frames, Fire-Rated: Knock-down type.

1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled.F. Borrowed Lites Glazing Frames: Construction and face dimensions to match door frames, and as

indicated on drawings.2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000, factory installed.B. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of

pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions.C. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for factory- or shop-assembled frames.

2.06 FINISHESA. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.C. Verify that finished walls are in plane to ensure proper door alignment.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and related requirements of

specified door and frame standards or custom guidelines indicated.B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.C. Coordinate installation of hardware.D. Coordinate installation of glazing.


















































3.03 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner.

3.04 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.

END OF SECTION








15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 08 1433 - 1 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS

SECTION 08 1433STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS


A. Wood doors, stile and rail design; fire rated, non-fire rated, and _____.B. Glass vision lites.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.B. Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting: Field finishing doors.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014.B. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork

Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2005, 8th Ed., Version 2.0.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Specimen warranty.C. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, ratings, swings, special

beveling, special blocking for hardware, factory machining criteria, factory finishing criteria.D. Samples: Submit two samples of door construction, 12x12 inch in size cut from top corner of door.E. Warranty, executed in Owner's name.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this

section with minimum three years of documented experience.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Quality Standards Illustrated,Section 1300.

1.07 WARRANTYA. Exterior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for minimum of 2 years.B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective

materials, and telegraphing core construction.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Stile and Rail Wood Doors:1. ______.2. Or Approved Equal.

2.02 DOORSA. Quality Level: Custom Grade, Heavy Duty performance, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS).B. Exterior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; solid lumber construction; mortise and

tenon joints; water repellent treated. Transparent finish where indicated on drawings.C. Ratings: Provide rated doors bearing the UL designation.

2.03 DOOR AND PANEL FACINGSA. Adhesive: Type I - Waterproof.

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 08 1433 - 2 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. Panel or Glass Retention Molding: Wood of same species as door facing, molded stop applied

one-side, mitered corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws.B. Glass lites: Clear vision glass as indicated in the drawings, factory glazed with sticking profile to match

door.2.05 DOOR CONSTRUCTION

A. Fabricate in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Quality Standards Illustrated, Section 1400, Custom grade.2.06 FACTORY FINISHING

A. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS), Section 5 - Finishing for grade specified andas follows:

B. Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample. See Section 09900 Paints and Coatings fortransparent finishes for wood.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out of tolerance for size or alignment.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standards.B. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door.C. Adjust width of non-rated doors by cutting equally on both jamb edges.D. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch.E. Machine cut for hardware.F. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.

3.03 TOLERANCESA. Conform to specified quality standard for fit, clearance, and joinery tolerances.

3.04 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.

3.05 SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGSEND OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 08 3100 - 1 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

SECTION 08 3100ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS


A. Ceiling access door and frame units.1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 ACCESS DOOR AND PANEL APPLICATIONS2.02 WALL AND CEILING UNITS

A. Access Doors: Factory fabricated door and frame units, fully assembled units with corner joints welded,filled, and ground flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with assemblies thatunits are to be installed in.1. Material: Steel.2. Door Style: Single thickness with rolled or turned in edges.3. Steel Finish: Primed.4. Primed and Factory Finish: Polyester powder coat; color as selected by Architect from

manufacturer's standard colors.5. Hardware:

a. Hardware for Fire Rated Units: As required for listing.b. Hinges for Non-Fire-Rated Units: Concealed, constant force closure spring type.


A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install frames plumb and level in openings. Secure rigidly in place.C. Position units to provide convenient access to the concealed work requiring access.

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 08 5113 - 1 ALUMINUM WINDOWS

SECTION 08 5113ALUMINUM WINDOWS


A. Extruded aluminum windows with fixed sash, operating sash, and infill panels.B. Factory glazing.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for windows,

doors, and skylights; 2011.B. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; 2012.

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Grade Substantiation: Prior to submitting shop drawings or starting fabrication, submit one of the

following showing compliance with specified grade:1. Evidence of AAMA Certification.2. Evidence of WDMA Certification.3. Evidence of CSA Certification.4. Test report(s) by independent testing agency itemizing compliance and acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 BASIS OF DESIGN - AW PERFORMANCE CLASS WINDOWS

A. Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 having Performance Class of AW, and Performance Gradeat least as high as specified design pressure.

B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.2.02 WINDOWS

A. Aluminum Windows: Extruded aluminum frame and sash, factory fabricated, factory finished, withoperating hardware, related flashings, and anchorage and attachment devices.1. Fabrication: Joints and corners flush, hairline, and weatherproof, accurately fitted and secured;

prepared to receive anchors; fasteners and attachments concealed from view; reinforced asrequired for operating hardware and imposed loads.

2. Perimeter Clearance: Minimize space between framing members and adjacent construction whileallowing expected movement.

3. Movement: Accommodate movement between window and perimeter framing and deflection oflintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals.

4. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any waterentering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring withinsystem.

B. Fixed, Non-Operable Type:1. Construction: Thermally broken.2. Glazing: Double; clear; transparent.

2.03 FINISHESA. Class I Color Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A42 Integrally colored anodic coating not less

than 0.7 mils thick.B. Finish Color: As indicated on drawings.

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 08 5113 - 2 ALUMINUM WINDOWS


A. Install windows in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and

other irregularities.C. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with

adjacent work.D. Install sill and sill end angles.E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack fibrous

insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier.3.02 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 1/16 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/8 inches per 10 ft,whichever is less.

3.03 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weathertight closure.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Remove protective material from factory finished aluminum surfaces.B. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to window manufacturer; rinse and wipe

surfaces clean.END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 08 5313 - 1 VINYL WINDOWS

SECTION 08 5313VINYL WINDOWS


A. Vinyl-framed, factory-glazed windows.B. Operating hardware.


A. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for windows,doors, and skylights; 2011.

B. ASTM E1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed ExteriorWindows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference;2015.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Submit two samples of operating hardware.C. Grade Substantiation: Prior to submitting shop drawings or starting fabrication, submit one of the

following showing compliance with specified grade:1. Evidence of AAMA Certification.2. Evidence of WDMA Certification.3. Evidence of CSA Certification.4. Test report(s) by independent testing agency itemizing compliance and acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section,with not less than three years of experience.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F.

1.07 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Vinyl Windows: Factory fabricated frame and sash members of extruded, hollow, ultra-violet-resistant,polyvinyl chloride (PVC) with integral color; with factory-installed glazing, hardware, related flashings,anchorage and attachment devices.1. Configuration: As indicated on drawings.

a. Product Type: AP - Awning projected window, C - Casement window, DW - Dual windows,FW - Fixed window, H - Hung window, vertically sliding, HS - Horizontal sliding window, and_____.

2. Color: Color as scheduled.3. Size to fit openings with minimum clearance around perimeter of assembly providing necessary

space for perimeter seals.4. Framing Members: Fusion welded corners and joints, with internal reinforcement where required

for structural rigidity; concealed fasteners.5. System Internal Drainage: Drain to exterior side by means of weep drainage network any water

entering joints, condensation within glazing channel, or other migrating moisture within system.6. Glazing Stops, Trim, Flashings, and Accessory Pieces: Formed of rigid PVC, fitting tightly into

frame assembly.

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 08 5313 - 2 VINYL WINDOWS

B. Performance Requirements: Provide products that comply with the following:1. Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 requirements for specific window type:

a. Performance Class (PC): R.2.02 COMPONENTS

A. Glazing: Insulated double pane, annealed glass, clear, low-E coated, argon filled, with glassthicknesses as recommended by manufacturer for specified wind conditions and acoustic ratingindicated.

B. Accessories: Provide related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices as necessary for fullassembly.

2.03 HARDWAREPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive this work.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install window unit assemblies in accordance with manufacturers instructions and applicable buildingcodes.

B. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances andother irregularities as necessary.

C. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist, and maintain dimensional tolerances and alignmentwith adjacent work.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Test installed windows for compliance with performance requirements for water penetration, in

accordance with ASTM E1105 using uniform pressure and same pressure difference as specified forlaboratory tests.1. If any window fails, test additional windows at Contractor's expense.

B. Replace windows that have failed field testing and retest until performance is satisfactory.3.04 CLEANING

A. Remove protective material from pre-finished surfaces.B. Remove excess glazing sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to

sealant manufacturer and appropriate for application indicated.END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 08 7100 - 1 DOOR HARDWARE

SECTION 08 7100DOOR HARDWARE


A. Hardware for Stile and Rail Wood and Molded Interior doors.B. Hardware for fire-rated doors.C. Electrically operated and controlled hardware.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.B. Section 08 1433 - Stile and Rail Wood Doors.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. BHMA A156.18 - American National Standard for Materials and Finishes; 2012.B. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2016.C. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products that door hardware will be installed

upon.B. Convey Owner's keying requirements to manufacturers.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware, schedules, catalog cuts .C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's

name and registered with manufacturer.D. Maintenance Materials and Tools: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE1.07 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS - BASIS OF DESIGN2.02 DOOR HARDWARE - GENERAL

A. Provide hardware specified or required to make doors fully functional, compliant with applicable codes,and secure to the extent indicated.

B. Provide items of a single type of the same model by the same manufacturer.C. Provide products that comply with the following:

1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes.2. Fire-Rated Doors: NFPA 80.3. Hardware on Fire-Rated Doors, Except Hinges: Listed and classified by UL (DIR) as suitable for

the purpose specified and indicated.4. Hardware for Smoke and Draft Control Doors (Indicated as "S" on Drawings): Provide hardware

that enables door assembly to comply with air leakage requirements of the applicable code.5. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL (DIR) as suitable for the

purpose specified and indicated.


D. Electrically Operated and/or Controlled Hardware: Provide all power supplies, power transfer hinges,relays, and interfaces required for proper operation; provide wiring between hardware and controlcomponents and to building power connection.

E. Finishes: Provide door hardware of the same finish unless otherwise indicated.1. Primary Finish: Satin chrome plated over nickel on brass or bronze, 626 (approx US26D).2. Secondary Finish: Satin chrome plated over nickel on brass or bronze, 626 (approx US26D).

a. Use secondary finish in kitchens, bathrooms, and other spaces containing chrome or stainlesssteel finished appliances, fittings, and equipment; provide primary finish on one side of doorand secondary finish on other side if necessary.

3. Finish Definitions: BHMA A156.18.4. Exceptions:

a. Where base metal is specified to be different, provide finish that is an appearance equivalentaccording to BHMA A156.18.

b. Hinges for Fire-Rated Doors: Steel base metal with painted finish.2.03 LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Locks: Provide a lock for every door, unless specifically indicated as not requiring locking.1. If no hardware set is indicated for a swinging door provide an office lockset.2. Trim: Provide lever handle or pull trim on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to have no

outside trim.3. Lock Cylinders: Provide key access on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to have no

locking or no outside trim.B. Lock Cylinders: Manufacturer’s standard tumbler type, six-pin standard core.

1. Provide cams and/or tailpieces as required for locking devices required.C. Keying: Grand master keyed.D. Latches: Provide a latch for every door that is not required to lock, unless specifically indicated

"push/pull" or "not required to latch".2.04 HINGES

A. Hinges - Basis of Design: ______.B. Hinges: Provide hinges on every swinging door.

1. Provide five-knuckle full mortise butt hinges unless otherwise indicated.2. Provide hinges in the quantities indicated.3. Provide non-removable pins on exterior outswinging doors.4. Where electrified hardware is mounted in door leaf, provide power transfer hinges.

2.05 LOCKS AND LATCHESA. Locks: Provide a lock for every door, unless specifically indicated as not requiring locking.

1. Hardware Sets indicate locking functions required for each door.2. If no hardware set is indicated for a swinging door provide an office lockset.3. Trim: Provide lever handle or pull trim on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to have no

outside trim.4. Lock Cylinders: Provide key access on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to have no

locking or no outside trim.B. Lock Cylinders: Manufacturer’s standard tumbler type, six-pin standard core.

1. Provide cams and/or tailpieces as required for locking devices required.C. Keying: Grand master keyed.D. Latches: Provide a latch for every door that is not required to lock, unless specifically indicated

"push/pull" or "not required to latch".2.06 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DOOR HARDWARE PRODUCTS

A. Provide products that comply with the following:1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes.


2. ANSI/ICC A117.1, American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.3. Applicable provisions of NFPA 101, Life Safety Code.4. Fire-Rated Doors: NFPA 80.5. All Hardware on Fire-Rated Doors : Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose

specified and indicated.B. Finishes: Identified in schedule at end of section.

2.07 KEYINGA. Door Locks: Grand master keyed.

2.08 KEY CABINETA. Cabinet Construction: Sheet steel construction, piano hinged door with ________ type lock master

keyed to building system; ________ manufactured by ____________.B. Horizontal metal strips for key hook labelling with clear plastic strip cover over labels.C. Finish: Baked enamel, ________ color.


A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work; labeled, fire-rated doors and frames are presentand properly installed, and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.

B. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct characteristics.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes.B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.C. Install hardware on fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80.D. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: As indicated in the

drawings. 3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 7000.B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation.

3.04 PROTECTIONA. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01 7000.B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish.

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 08 8000 - 1 GLAZING

SECTION 08 8000GLAZING

PART 2 PRODUCTS1.01 INSULATING GLASS UNITS

A. Type IG-1 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Vision glass, double glazed.1. Application: All exterior glazing unless otherwise indicated.2. Outboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum.

a. Tint: Clear.3. Inboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum.

a. Tint: Clear.4. Total Thickness: 1 inch.

1.02 GLASS MATERIALSA. Float Glass: Provide float glass based glazing unless noted otherwise.

1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I - Transparent Flat, Class 1 - Clear, Quality-Q3.2. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048, Kind HS and Kind FT.3. Tinted Types: ASTM C1036, Class 2 - Tinted, color and performance characteristics as indicated.4. Thicknesses: As indicated; for exterior glazing comply with requirements indicated for wind load

design regardless of thickness indicated.B. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing: Type, thickness, and configuration as required to achieve indicated

ratings.1. IBC Fire Protection Rating: As indicated on drawings.2. Provide products listed by Underwriters Laboratories or Intertek Warnock Hersey.3. Labeling: Provide permanent label on each piece giving the IBC rating and other information

required by the applicable code.1.03 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS

A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated.1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190.2. Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners.3. Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant.4. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air.


A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede

moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.2.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.D. Install sealants in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2.03 PROTECTIONA. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark heat

absorbing or reflective glass units.END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 09 2116 - 1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

SECTION 09 2116GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES


A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies.B. Gypsum sheathing.C. Gypsum wallboard.D. Joint treatment and accessories.E. Water-resistive barrier over exterior wall sheathing.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.B. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Water-resistive barrier over sheathing.C. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Top-of-wall assemblies at fire rated walls.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum

Board; 2015.B. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013.C. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application of Gypsum

Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2014.D. ASTM C1280 - Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing Board; 2013.E. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2014.F. ASTM C1629/C1629M - Standard Classification for Abuse-Resistant Nondecorated Interior Gypsum

Panel Products and Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels; 2015.G. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior

Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2012.H. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss

of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009.I. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2010.J. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013.K. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.B. Interior Partitions, Indicated as Acoustic: Provide completed assemblies with the following

characteristics:C. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies as Shown on drawings.

1. UL Assembly Numbers: Provide construction equivalent to that listed for the particular assembly inthe current UL (FRD).

2.02 BOARD MATERIALSA. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to

minimize joints in place; ends square cut.1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.2. Thickness:

a. Vertical Surfaces: 1/2 inch.B. Impact Resistant Wallboard:

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 09 2116 - 2 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

1. Application: High-traffic areas indicated.2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.3. Type: Fire resistance rated Type X, UL or WH listed.4. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

C. Exterior Sheathing Board: Sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.1. Application: Exterior sheathing, unless otherwise indicated.2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.3. Type X Thickness: 5/8 inch.4. Edges: Square.

D. Shaftwall and Coreboard: Type X; 1 inch thick by 24 inches wide, beveled long edges, ends square cut.1. Paper Faced Type: Gypsum shaftliner board or gypsum coreboard as defined ASTM

C1396/C1396M; water-resistant faces.2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Water-Resistive Barrier: .B. Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project

conditions.1. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated.

C. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Cold-Formed Steel Studs Less than 0.033 inch inThickness and Wood Members: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping screws, corrosion resistant.


A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.3.02 SHAFT WALL INSTALLATION

A. Shaft Wall Framing: Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.B. Shaft Wall Liner: Cut panels to accurate dimension and install sequentially between special friction

studs. 3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASTM C 840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints,especially in highly visible locations.

B. Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of assemblylisting.

C. Exterior Sheathing: Comply with ASTM C1280. Install sheathing vertically, with edges butted tight andends occurring over firm bearing.1. Paper-Faced Sheathing: Immediately after installation, protect from weather by application of

water-resistive barrier.3.04 JOINT TREATMENT

A. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise indicated.2. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed

construction.B. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive

finishes.1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.

END OF SECTION

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C1396/C1396M

































15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 09 6500 - 1 RESILIENT FLOORING

SECTION 09 6500RESILIENT FLOORING


A. Resilient sheet flooring.B. Resilient plank flooring.C. Installation accessories.


A. ASTM F1700 - Standard Specification for Solid Vinyl Tile; 2013a.1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end.1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F.B. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of

70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SHEET FLOORING2.02 PLANK FLOORING

A. Vinyl Plank: Surface-decorated, with wear layer, and:1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1700, of Class corresponding to type specified.2. Size: 4-1/2" x 36" inch planks.3. Pattern: Wood grain.4. Manufacturers:

a. Congoleum; Product: Duraplank.b. Mohawk; Product: Ultimate Step.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer.B. Primers, Adhesives, and Seam Sealer: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PREPARATION

A. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers.B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with

sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface.C. Prohibit traffic until filler is fully cured.D. Clean substrate.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.D. Fit joints and butt seams tightly.E. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 09 6500 - 2 RESILIENT FLOORING

F. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooringunder centerline of door.

G. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated.H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints.

3.03 SHEET FLOORINGA. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to longer room dimensions, to produce minimum number of

seams. Lay out seams to avoid widths less than 1/3 of roll width; match patterns carefully at seams.B. Seams are prohibited in bathrooms and toilet rooms.C. Double cut sheet at seams.D. Lay flooring with tightly butted seams, without any seam sealer unless otherwise indicated.

3.04 PLANK FLOORINGA. Mix planks from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when planks are placed, unless

manufacturer's instructions say otherwise.B. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical pattern.

3.05 CLEANINGA. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

3.06 PROTECTIONA. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 09 6800 - 1 CARPETING

SECTION 09 6800CARPETING


A. Carpet, stretched-in with cushion underlay, direct-glued, and _____.B. Accessories.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. CRI 104 - Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet; 2015.B. CRI (CIS) - Carpet Installation Standard; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2009.C. CRI 104 - Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floorcovering Materials; Carpet and Rug

Institute; 2002.1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet with minimum three years documentedexperience.

1.04 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation.


A. Carpet:1. Mohawk; Product: Season Ticket.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 CARPETA. Carpet, Type _____:

1. Color: As selected by Architect.2.03 CUSHION

A. Cushion, Type _____: Cellular rubberDouble bond rubber carpet pad.2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Tackless Strip: Carpet gripper, of type recommended by carpet manufacturer to suit application, withattachment devices.

B. Seam Adhesive: Recommended by manufacturer.C. Contact Adhesive: Compatible with carpet material; releasable type.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.B. Install carpet and cushion in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI 104 (Commercial).C. Install carpet and cushion in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI 104.D. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots.E. Lay out carpet and locate seams in accordance with shop drawings.

1. Locate seams in area of least traffic, out of areas of pivoting traffic, and parallel to main traffic.2. Do not locate seams perpendicular through door openings.3. Align run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic and in same direction on adjacent pieces.4. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline.5. Provide monolithic color, pattern, and texture match within any one area.

F. Install carpet tight and flat on subfloor, well fastened at edges, with a uniform appearance.

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 09 6800 - 2 CARPETING

3.02 STRETCHED-IN CARPETA. Install tackless strips with pins facing the wall around entire perimeter, except across door openings.

Use edge strip where carpet terminates at other floor coverings.B. Space tackless strips slightly less than carpet thickness away from vertical surfaces, but not more than

3/8 inch.C. Install cushion in maximum size pieces using spot adhesive to adhere to sub-floor.D. Lay out cushion so that seams will be perpendicular to, or offset from, minimum 6 inches from carpet

seams.E. Butt cushion edges together and tape seams.F. Trim cushion tight to edge of tackless strip and around projections and contours.G. Double cut carpet seams, with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed. Apply

seam adhesive to all cut edges immediately.H. Join seams using hot adhesive tape. Form seams straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps.I. Following seaming, hook carpet onto tackless strip at one edge, power stretch, and hook firmly at other

edges. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for method and amount of stretch.J. Trim carpet neatly at walls and around interruptions. Tuck edges into space between tackless strip and

wall.3.03 DIRECT-GLUED CARPET

A. Double cut carpet seams, with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed. Applyseam adhesive to cut edges of woven carpet immediately.

B. Apply contact adhesive to floor uniformly at rate recommended by manufacturer. After sufficient opentime, press carpet into adhesive.

C. Apply seam adhesive to the base of the edge glued down. Lay adjoining piece with seam straight, notoverlapped or peaked, and free of gaps.

D. Roll with appropriate roller for complete contact of adhesive to carpet backing.E. Trim carpet neatly at walls and around interruptions.

3.04 INSTALLATION ON STAIRSA. Use one piece of carpet for each tread and the riser below. Apply seam adhesive to all cut edges.B. Install carpet with pile direction in the length of the stair.C. Adhere carpet tight to stair treads and risers.

3.05 CLEANINGA. Remove excess adhesive from floor and wall surfaces without damage.B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 09 6813 - 1 TILE CARPETING

SECTION 09 6813TILE CARPETING


A. Carpet tile, fully adhered.1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. CRI (CIS) - Carpet Installation Standard; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2011.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. interface, Inc.; Product As shown on Drawings.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type of work andare ready to receive carpet tile.

B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, aredust-free, and are ready to receive carpet tile.

C. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for flooringinstallation by testing for moisture and pH.1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring material

manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.B. Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps.D. Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate.E. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions.F. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges.

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 09 9000 - 1 PAINTING AND COATING

SECTION 09 9000PAINTING AND COATING


A. Surface preparation.B. Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings.C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless

otherwise indicated, including the following:1. Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment before installing

equipment.2. Exposed surfaces of steel lintels and ledge angles.3. Mechanical and Electrical:

a. In finished areas, paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated andexposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, and electricalequipment, unless otherwise indicated.

b. In finished areas, paint shop-primed items.c. On the roof and outdoors, paint all equipment that is exposed to weather or to view, including

that which is factory-finished.d. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are

visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces.e. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to

match face panels.D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:

1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products havingfactory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.

2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment.5. Floors, unless specifically so indicated.6. Glass.7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural

Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.B. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and

Wood-Base Materials; 2007.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code,

coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions formixing and reducing.

C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degreesF, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.

1.05 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges

required by the paint product manufacturer.


B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing ofsubstrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.

C. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; noexceptions.

B. Provide all paint and coating products from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible.C. Paints:

1. Behr Process Corporation: www.behr.com.2. Diamond Vogel Paints: www.diamondvogel.com.3. Glidden Professional, a product of PPG Architectural Coatings: www.gliddenprofessional.com.4. Benjamin Moore & Co: www.benjaminmoore.com.5. PPG Paints: www.ppgpaints.com.6. Pratt & Lambert Paints: www.prattandlambert.com.7. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com.

D. Stains:1. Base Manufacturer: Cabot Stains.2. Or approved equal.

E. Block Fillers: Same manufacturer as top coats.F. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERALA. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating.

1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformlydispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable ofdrying or curing free of streaks or sags.

2. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a singleproduction run.

3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure isspecifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.

B. Primers: As follows unless other primer is required or recommended by manufacturer of top coats;where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as"best" by the manufacturer.

C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following:

a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards forArchitectural Coatings.

2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; orother method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIORA. Paint WE-OP-3A - Wood, Opaque, Alkyd, 3 Coat:

1. One coat of latex primer sealer.B. Paint CE-OP-2A - Masonry/Concrete, Opaque, Alkyd, 2 Coat:

1. One coat of block filler.2. Flat: One coat of alkyd enamel; ____.

C. Paint GE-OP-3L - Gypsum Board and Plaster, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat:1. One coat of latex primer sealer.2. Flat: Two coats of latex; ____.


D. Paint ME-OP-3L - Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Latex, 3 Coat:1. One coat of latex primer.2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; ____.

E. Paint ME-OP-2A - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Alkyd, 2 Coat:1. Touch-up with rust-inhibitive primer recommended by top coat manufacturer.2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel; ____.

2.04 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIORA. Paint WI-OP-3L - Wood, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat:

1. One coat of latex primer sealer.2. Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; ___________________.3. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; ___________________.4. Eggshell: Two coats of latex enamel; ___________________.5. Flat: Two coats of latex enamel; ___________________.

B. Paint MI-OP-2L - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Latex, 2 Coat:1. Touch-up with latex primer.2. Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; ____.3. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; ____.

C. Paint CI-OP-3E - Concrete/Masonry, Epoxy Enamel, 3 Coat:1. One coat of catalyzed epoxy primer.2. Gloss: Two coats of catalyzed epoxy enamel; ____.

D. Paint GI-OP-3L - Gypsum Board/Plaster, Latex, 3 Coat:1. One coat of alkyd primer sealer.2. Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; ___________________.3. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; ___________________.4. Eggshell: Two coats of latex enamel; ___________________.5. Flat: Two coats of latex enamel; ___________________.

2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALSA. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials,

and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically indicated or not;commercial quality.

B. Patching Material: Latex filler.C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.


A. Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared.B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that

may potentially affect proper application.D. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless

moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent.3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.4. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.


B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result forthe substrate under the project conditions.

C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.

D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.E. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and

bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.F. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after

repair.G. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent.

Apply coat of etching primer.H. Corroded Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Prepare using at least SSPC-SP 2 (hand tool cleaning)

or SSPC-SP 3 (power tool cleaning) followed by SSPC-SP 1 (solvent cleaning).I. Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter,

dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand or power tool wire brushingor sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuringweld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs.

J. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steelsurfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.

K. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots,pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sandbetween coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.

L. Exterior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter. Seal knots,pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking compound after prime coathas been applied. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.

M. Exterior Wood to Receive Transparent Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter; seal knots, pitchstreaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking compound after sealerhas been applied. Prime concealed surfaces.

N. Wood Doors to be Field-Finished: Seal wood door top and bottom edge surfaces with clear sealer.3.03 APPLICATION

A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electricalcomponents and paint separately.

B. Exterior Wood to Receive Opaque Finish: If final painting must be delayed more than 2 weeks afterinstallation of woodwork, apply primer within 2 weeks and final coating within 4 weeks.

C. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.D. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied.E. Apply each coat to uniform appearance.F. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.G. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to

applying next coat.H. Wood to Receive Transparent Finishes: Tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before

set. Wipe excess from surface.I. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to

finishing.3.04 SCHEDULE - COLORS

A. For Exterior Colors See Exterior Paint schedule provided by Nequette.


B. For Interior colors see Paint Schedule or as selected by Nequette.END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 10 4400 - 1 FIRE PROTECTIONSPECIALTIES

SECTION 10 4400FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES


A. Fire extinguishers.B. Fire extinguisher cabinets.C. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 21 1200 - Fire-Suppression Standpipes: Cabinet enclosure for extinguishers.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2013.B. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes,whichever is more stringent.1. Provide extinguishers labeled by UL (DIR) for the purpose specified and indicated.

2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETSA. Metal: Formed primed steel sheet; 0.036 inch thick base metal.B. Cabinet Configuration: Semi-recessed type.

1. Sized to accommodate accessories.C. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. Pre-drill for anchors.D. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White enamel.

2.03 ACCESSORIESPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Place extinguishers in cabinets.

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 12 3600 - 1 COUNTERTOPS

SECTION 12 3600COUNTERTOPS


A. Countertops for architectural cabinet work.B. Epoxy resin sinks.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ISFA 2-01 - Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material; 2013.B. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation; combine with shop drawings of cabinets

and casework specified in other sections.C. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips representing manufacturer's full range

of available colors and patterns.D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, minimum size 6 inches square, representing

actual product, color, and patterns.1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in

accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 COUNTERTOPS

A. Natural Stone Countertops: Stone slabs bonded to substrate; use as large pieces as possible withinconspicuous adhesive joints.1. Stone: Granite without cracks, voids, or pin holes; filling with matching epoxy resin is acceptable.2. Color: to be specified by Nequette.3. Stone Thickness: 3/4 inch, minimum.4. Surface Finish: Honed, non-glare.5. Exposed Edge Treatment: Square profile stone, 1 inch thick, with 3/16 inch radius corner.6. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same thickness; for field attachment.

2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALSA. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of materials

being joined.B. Joint Sealant: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant, white.

2.03 FABRICATIONA. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush.

1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer.2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against cabinet or

wall.3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or unnecessary

cutouts or fixture holes.B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise indicated.

1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof glue.

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 12 3600 - 2 COUNTERTOPS

2. Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.B. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets are

installed in proper locations.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for

the substrate under the project conditions.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level; shimwhere required.

B. Attach plastic laminate countertops using screws with minimum penetration into substrate board of 5/8inch.

C. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces.3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 26 5600 - 1 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

SECTION 26 5600EXTERIOR LIGHTING


A. Exterior luminaires.B. Poles and accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 0537 - Boxes.B. Section 26 5013 - Luminaire Schedule.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.B. NECA/IESNA 501 - Standard for Installing Exterior Lighting Systems; 2006.C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction,

Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.D. UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Mel Northey LightingB. Progress Lighting /Hubble Lighting.

2.02 LUMINAIRE TYPESA. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the Drawings.

2.03 LUMINAIRESA. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts,

reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lampand distribute the light.

E. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors,hardware, poles, foundations, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operatingsystem.

F. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage,distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.

2.04 POLESA. Manufacturers:

1. Mel Northey.B. All Poles:

1. Provide poles and associated support components suitable for the luminaire(s) and associatedsupports and accessories to be installed.


A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0537 as required for installation ofluminaires provided under this section.

B. Install products according to manufacturer's instructions.

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 26 5600 - 2 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

C. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1 (generalworkmanship) and NECA/IESNA 501 (exterior lighting).

D. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires.E. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.F. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.G. Install poles plumb.H. Install lamps in each luminaire.I. Bond luminaires, metal accessories, and metal poles to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

Provide supplementary grounding electrode at each pole.3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Inspect each product for damage and defects.C. Perform field inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 4000.D. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.E. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or replace

excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect.3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as directed byArchitect. Secure locking fittings in place.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean surfaces according to NECA/IESNA 501 and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt,

fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore finishes to match original factory finish.B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.C. Clean finishes and touch up damage.

3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES3.06 SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGS

END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 05 00

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS


PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. General Conditions:

1. The accompanying General Conditions (front-end specifications) shall apply to and form a part of this section.

B. General Requirements:

1. Carefully examine General Conditions, other specification sections, and other drawings (in addition to Electrical) in order to be fully acquainted with their effect on electrical work.

2. Do all work in compliance with all applicable codes, laws, and ordinances, the National Electrical Safety Code, the National Electrical Code (hereinafter referred to as “Code”), applicable energy codes, and the regulations of the local utility companies. Obtain and pay for any and all required permits, inspections, certificates of inspections and approval, and the like.

3. Cooperate with other trades and contractors at job. Perform work in such manner and at such times as not to delay work of other trades. Complete all work as soon as the structure and installations of equipment will permit. Patch, in a satisfactory manner and by the proper craft, any work damaged by electrical workmen.

4. Electrical contracting firm shall be licensed as an electrical contractor in the state where work will be performed

1.02 GENERAL SCOPE OF ELECTRICAL WORK (REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR OTHER SPECIFIC SCOPE ITEMS)

A. Furnish all labor and materials to complete electrical work as shown on drawings and/or herein specified.

B. Remove all existing electrical equipment and wiring made obsolete by this project and remove or relocate all electrical services located on or crossing through the project property, either above or below grade, which would obstruct the construction of the project or conflict in any manner with the completed project or any code pertaining thereto. Dispose of salvageable materials as directed by the Architect. Contractor shall schedule meeting to review scope of electrical demolition and to confirm scope and phasing of proposed demolition with the owner in the presence of the prime consultant prior to start of any electrical demolition.

C. Furnish and install complete power, telephone and other electrical services as shown on drawings and/or specified herein.

D. Pay all electrical utility company service charges (if any) in connection therewith, including permanent meter deposit. Meter deposits will be refunded to Contractor at time of Owner’s acceptance.

E. Furnish and install complete power distribution system as shown on drawings and/or specified herein.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 00


F. Furnish and install disconnect switches for motors as shown on drawings and/or specified herein.

G. Furnish and install complete electrical grounding systems as shown on drawings and/or specified herein.

H. Install and connect electrical equipment mentioned in Division 26/27/28 Specifications or noted in drawings, whether furnished by electrical contractor or by others.

1. Where shown or specified, equipment furnished by others shall be installed and connected under this Contract.

2. Where shown or specified, Contractor shall receive, unpack, check and assume custody of equipment furnished by Others. Contractor shall assume responsibility for care and safekeeping of this equipment, when delivered into his custody. He shall protect it from moisture, dust and damage during construction and until Owner acceptance of project.

I. Furnish and install complete electrical lighting systems as shown on drawings and/or specified herein.

J. Furnish and install all electrical items shown on drawings and/or herein specified, unless shown or specified otherwise.

K. Furnish and install complete controls & auxiliary systems as shown on drawings and/or specified herein.

L. Furnish and install complete telephone/data raceway (including all outlet boxes, face plates, conduit raceways, telephone backboards, terminal cabinets, etc.) system as shown on drawings and/or specified herein.

M. Furnish and install a complete Fire Alarm System as shown on drawings and/or specified herein.

N. Furnish and install a complete Surge Protection System as shown on drawings and/or specified herein.

O. Procure and pay for permits and certificates as required by local and state ordinances and fire underwriter’s certificate of inspection.

P. Balance loads as equally as practicable on services, distribution feeders, circuits and buses. Provide typewritten directory for each panel.

Q. Unless specifically indicated or required otherwise, terminate all circuitry/cabling provided within this contract at associated equipment/devices/etc. in accordance with all applicable codes, standards and supplier requirements, whether associated equipment/device/etc. is furnished within this contract or by others.

R. Complete field testing, adjustment & startup of all systems listed above as shown on drawings and/or specified herein.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 APPROVED MATERIALS AND DEVICES

A. Where not otherwise specified, provide only new, standard, first-grade materials/systems throughout, conforming to standards established by Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc., and so marked or labeled, together with manufacturer’s brand or trademark. All equipment/systems subject to approval of Architect before installation. All like items and associated



equipment/systems shall be of one manufacturer.

B. To insure proper coordination, it is intended that all electrical equipment and materials specified in Division 26/27/28 of these specifications and shown on the electrical drawings be furnished and installed by the electrical sub-contractor. It will not be permissible for any of these items to be furnished directly by the general contractor without the electrical contractor’s coordination.

C. To insure commonality of spare parts, it is required that the electrical contractor provide the same brand for all circuit breakers, starters, power equipment, etc. provided under the following divisions of these specifications:

1. SECTION 26 24 16: POWER PANELBOARDS - CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE 2. SECTION 26 24 17: LIGHTING PANELBOARDS 3. SECTION 26 24 18: METER CENTERS 4. SECTION 26 28 16: SAFETY SWITCHES AND FUSES

2.02 SUBMITTALS

A. All submittals to the design team shall be accompanied by a letter summarizing all proposed deviations from specified products or pre-approved substitutions. The absence of such a letter shall be understood to indicate that the contractor intends to meet all contract requirements, regardless of cut-sheets/data-sheets provided within the submittal.

B. Submit to Architect ten (10) days prior to bid date three (3) copies of any items and/or manufacturers which are proposed as substitutes for those specified.

C. Submit to Architect promptly after award of Contract and prior to purchasing, the number of copies required by the contract. All drawings of a specific item or system shall be made in one submittal, and within thirty (30) days after award of Contract. Shop drawings of all power equipment shall contain exact details of device placement, phasing and numbering, in form of elevations, for each major piece of equipment. Shop drawings shall be submitted on the following:

1. SECTION 26 24 16: POWER PANELBOARDS - CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE 2. SECTION 26 24 17: LIGHTING PANELBOARDS 3. SECTION 26 24 18: METER CENTERS 4. SECTION 26 28 16: SAFETY SWITCHES AND FUSES 5. SECTION 26 43 00: SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 6. SECTION 26 50 00: LIGHTING MATERIALS AND METHODS 7. SECTION 28 31 00: FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 8. ALL MISCELLANEOUS POWER DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 9. ALL ELECTRICAL AND TELECOMMUNICATION ROOM LAYOUTS - Submittals shall

include ¼” = 1’-0” CAD drawings (hand drawn sketches will not be accepted) of each electrical and IT room indicating all panelboards, transformers, switchboards, equipment racks, control panels, HVAC equipment, etc. that are located in each room. Layouts shall show that each piece of electrical equipment has the clearances, working space and dedicated equipment space required by applicable codes. No conduits to equipment within these rooms shall be installed until submittals have been provided and returned without exception by the design team.

D. The contractor shall fully review, comment upon and correct all shop drawings as required to assure compliance with contract documents prior to submittal to Architect. The failure of the contractor to properly review and correct shop drawings prior to submittal will result in rejection of shop drawings by the engineer. Review by the Architect will be for general conformance with contract documents. The contractor shall be fully responsible for correctness of all submitted dimensions, details, quantities and locations.



E. None of the above items shall be installed until shop drawings or catalog data have been reviewed by Architect without rejection or required resubmittal. Any listed item not submitted, even if specified, shall be considered not acceptable and shall be removed if directed.

F. Any required resubmittal will be reviewed by the Architect for conformance with previously issued comments only. The contractor shall be responsible for verifying that all items not specifically requiring resubmittal have not been altered from the previously reviewed submittal.

G. Material proposed for substitution shall be of the same quality, perform the same functions, conform to such physical dimensions and appearance as are required by the Architect. All material proposed for substitution is subject to the approval of the Architect and his authority for approval is final. No material proposed for substitution will be considered unless all submittal data complies with the drawings and specifications of Section 16 as to time of submission, number of copies of submittal, and detail requirements.

H. Samples of material shall be furnished where required by drawings or Division 26/27/28 Specification, or as requested by the Architect on items proposed as substitutes.

I. Submit to Architect a certificate of final inspection from local inspection department.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SITE VISIT

A. The Contractor shall visit the site to determine existing dimensions and conditions affecting electrical work. Failure to do so in no way relieves Contractor of his responsibility under Contract.

3.02 CLEARANCE WITH UTILITIES

A. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor, prior to bid, to reaffirm with the utility companies involved, that the locations, arrangement (and with power company voltage, phase, and metering required) and connections to utility service are in accordance with their regulations and requirements. If their requirements are at variance with these drawings and specifications, the Contract price shall include any additional cost necessary to meet those requirements without extra cost to Owner after a contract is entered into.

B. On many projects the utility company may levy charges due to locations, size or type service involved. The Contractor shall be responsible for these charges (including permanent meter deposit), unless such charges are not available prior to bid and Contractor so documents as described below. The meter deposit will be refunded to the contractor at time of Owner’s acceptance.

C. Should above cost not be available, prior to bid, Contractor must submit a letter signed by a responsible utility company person so stating with his bid and in turn must be submitted by Prime Contractor with his bid to Owner. The cost will then be deleted from the Contract and become responsibility of the Owner.

D. Arrange with utility companies for such services as shown or herein specified and installation of meter where shown. Furnish with shop drawings a signed document from utility companies describing the location and type of services to be furnished and any requirements they may have. This document shall be signed for each utility company by a person responsible for granting such service.

3.03 WORKMANSHIP



A. All work shall be in accordance with the latest editions of NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code), NFPA 101 (Life Safety Code), National Electric Safety Code, International Building Code, applicable NECA standards and the rules and regulations of State and Local Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

B. All work shall be executed in a workmanlike manner and shall present a neat and mechanical appearance upon completion.

C. All equipment, devices, etc. shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. All items shall be installed straight and plumb in a workmanlike manner and care shall be exercised so that like items are mounted the same position, heights and general location.

E. Keep site clean of accumulation of cartons, trash and debris.

3.04 SAFETY

A. The contractor is solely responsible for all job safety. Architect assumes no responsibility for job safety. Maximum consideration shall be given to job safety and only such methods as will reasonably insure the safety of all persons shall be employed. The codes and regulations of OSHA shall be given strict compliance as well as such other codes, laws, and regulations as may be applicable.

3.05 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Contract documents indicate diagrammatically, extent, general character and approximate location of work. Where work is indicated but minor details omitted, furnish and install it complete so as to perform its intended functions. For details and mechanical equipment, follow drawings provided by other disciplines (Architectural, Mechanical, Structural, Civil, etc.) and fit electrical work thereto.

B. Contract documents consist only of the hardcopy documents issued by the Prime Architect. Electronic documents issued directly by the electrical engineer to the contractor and/or its sub-contractors/vendors are issued for convenience only (electronic documents are not formal contract documents).

C. If the contractor and/or one of its suppliers require a one-time transfer of electronic files of the current electrical construction documents to prepare shop drawings (or for another similar purpose), it shall:

1. Sign a waiver prepared by the electrical engineer prior to the transmittal of these files. 2. Agree to pay the electrical engineer a fee of $50.00 per drawing, up to a maximum of $400

per transfer, payable upon receipt of the files. 3. To the fullest extent permitted by law, indemnify, hold harmless, and defend JRA from all

claims, damages, losses and expenses, including attorneys’ fees arising out of or resulting from the use of the CAD files.

D. Take finish dimensions at job in preference to scaled dimensions.

E. Except as above noted, make no changes in or deviations from work as shown or specified except on written order of Architect.

3.06 UNDERGROUND UTILITY/EQUIPMENT COORDINATION



A. Prior to commencement of work, verify exact locations of all existing or proposed underground utilities and/or underground equipment and verify that proposed electrical installation does not conflict with these items. Notify Architect immediately if any conflict is found.

3.07 EQUIPMENT STORAGE

A. Store all electrical equipment in dry, covered locations as directed by equipment manufacturers. Contractor shall be responsible for replacing or repairing improperly-storted equipment as directed by Architect.

3.08 EXCAVATION, CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Perform all cutting and excavating as necessary for installation of electrical systems, unless specifically covered under another section. After Architect’s observation, complete all excavation, filling and backfilling as directed under specifications for preparation of site and earthwork. Foundations for equipment shall be as specified under concrete section. Concrete pads shall be minimum of 6” thick; unless greater thickness required by equipment manufacturer. Obtain specific approval of Architect before cutting into any structural members.

B. For all such work employ competent workmen, and finish up in neat and workmanlike manner, equal to quality and appearance to adjacent work.

3.09 PENETRATIONS

A. Furnish roof flashing for all equipment installed under Division 26/27/28 that penetrates through the roof. Appropriate flashing is specified under roofing and sheet metal section. Supply these flashings for installation under roofing and sheet metal section.

B. All fire/smoke barrier penetrations shall be made in accordance with a U.L. listed assembly to maintain the fire/smoke rating of the associated membrane.

3.10 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT - GENERAL

A. Care shall be exercised in exact routing and location of all items so as not to obstruct access to equipment, personnel walkways, or expose it to potential mechanical damage.

B. Items shall be securely anchored and/or fastened. All construction shall meet the seismic design requirements of the building code. Items (especially transformers, light fixtures, equipment racks, freestanding gear, etc.) installed in seismic zones C, D, E or F shall be supported and braced per applicable codes and standards.

C. All wall, pole or frame-mounted electrical equipment shall be mounted to metal unistrut (or similar) frames of same material as electrical equipment. For example, pole-mounted painted or galvanized steel disconnect switches shall be mounted to galvanized steel unistrut frames.

D. All electrical equipment, furnished by Contractor or by others shall be covered and protected during construction.

E. All control cabinets, panels, motor control centers and other electrical cabinets and enclosures shall have all trash removed and be vacuumed clean. All foreign paint, etc., shall be removed from exterior and all scratches in finish touched up with same color and material as original. Any rusted areas shall be sanded, primed and repainted.

F. All relays, starters, push-button and other control devices shall be cleaned and if necessary, lubricated with CRC 2-26 to assure free operation.



3.11 MOTORS, STARTERS AND CONTROLS

A. Unless otherwise specified or shown, all motors will be furnished and installed under other sections of this specification.

B. Electrical Contractor shall install all starters and all electrical power wiring and connections to motors and starters.

C. Unless otherwise specified or shown, all control items for motors shall be furnished, installed and wired in conduit under other divisions of this specification.

3.12 CIRCUITS AND BRANCH CIRCUITS

A. Outlets shall be connected to branch circuits as indicated on drawings by circuit numbers. No more outlets than are indicated shall be connected to a circuit.

B. Branch circuit homeruns shall be installed as shown on drawings. Multiple homerun conduits shall not be combined by contractor into larger, single homerun conduits unless specific permission is granted by the Engineer.

3.13 LUG/TERMINAL RATINGS

A. All lug/terminal ratings, sizes, locations, types, etc. shall be coordinated with the associated conductor sizes, types, routings, etc. by the contractor.

B. All lugs/terminals/etc. shall be rated for 75 degree C terminations (minimum, unless specified otherwise).

3.14 EQUIPMENT FAULT CURRENT RATINGS

A. All equipment and breakers shall meet the minimum RMS symmetrical interrupting capacity ratings shown on plans for the associated distribution equipment. All interrupting ratings shall be full ratings. Where new devices or breakers are added to existing distribution equipment, the new devices/breakers shall have interrupting ratings matching or exceeding that of the existing distribution equipment.

3.15 OUTLET LOCATION

A. Symbols shown on drawings and mounting heights indicated on drawings and in specifications are approximate only. The exact locations and mounting height must be determined on the job and it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to coordinate with other trades to insure correct installation.

3.16 IDENTIFICATION

A. Each panel shall have each circuit identified. Panels without branch circuit nameplates shall have typewritten directories.

B. Each individually mounted switch, circuit breaker, starter and/or any other control or protective device shall identify equipment fed and fuse size, if any, by engraved plastic nameplate, white with black letters, screw attached.

C. See Specification Section 26 05 53 for additional requirements.

3.17 GROUNDING



A. All equipment shall be grounded and bonded in accordance with all state/local regulations, The National Electrical Code and as specified herein.

3.18 TELEPHONE WORK

A. Provide telephone raceways, outlets and backboards, as shown. Provide additional work as shown on drawings. Bond all raceways together at backboards and provide No. 6 ground wire extending from raceway bonds to cold water pipe, in 1/2 inch raceway. Carefully ream ends of all raceways.

3.19 PAINTING

A. Refer to Painting/Finishing specifications for requirements regarding field painting of exposed conduit. Any scratches, dents or rust spots in conduit electrical enclosures, panels, motor control or any other electrical items shall have the dents removed, and they, along with any rust spots or scratches, sanded and touched up with the same exact color paint as original finish.

3.20 ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A. Upon completion of work, the entire electrical system installed within this project shall be tested and shall be shown to be in perfect working condition, in accordance with the intent of the specifications and drawings. It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to have all systems ready for operation and to have an electrician available to operate same in accordance with and under the supervision of the observation representative(s) of the Architect. The Electrician shall be available to assist in removal of panel fronts, etc., to permit inspection as required.

B. The electrical sub-contractor shall include in bid price start-up assistance and training from a certified representative of the manufacturer for the following systems:

1. SECTION 28 31 00: FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

3.21 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. One set of marked “AS BUILT” drawings, three (3) sets of all equipment catalog and maintenance data and three (3) sets of all final shop drawings, on all equipment requiring same shall be turned over to owner. These items shall be bound in hard back book. Contractor shall explain and demonstrate all systems to Owner’s representative.

3.22 GUARANTY-WARRANTY

A. Furnish a written Guarantee-Warranty, countersigned and guaranteed by General Contractor, stating:

1. That all work executed under this section will be free from defects of workmanship and materials for a period of one (1) year from date of final acceptance of this work.

2. Above parties further agree that they will, at their own expense, repair and replace all such defective work, and all other work damaged thereby, which becomes defective during the term of the Guaranty-Warranty.

END OF SECTION 26 05 00

SECTION 26 05 19

POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 51V-600V


PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Power Wires and Cables

B. Low Voltage Wires and Cables

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 POWER WIRES AND CABLES - 600 VOLT

A. General: Conductors shall have current carrying capacities as per N.E.C. and with 600 volt insulation, #12 minimum except for controls and fixture wire. Conductors shall be copper.

B. Aluminum conductors are acceptable for conductor sizes #1/0 and larger. Contractor shall install equivalent aluminum size to match copper rating indicated on plans. Increase conduit size and quantity as required.

C. General Application (see below for exceptions):

1. At or Below Grade (including within slab-on-grade):

a. #8 or larger conductors:

1) XHHW or RHH/RHW/USE stranded (in conduit).

b. #10 or smaller conductors for circuits terminating at motors:

1) THHN/THWN or XHHW stranded (in conduit).

c. #10 or smaller conductors (excluding circuits terminating at motors):

1) THHN/THWN or XHHW solid (in conduit).

2. Above Grade:

a. #8 or larger conductors:

1) THHN/THWN, XHHW or RHH/RHW/USE stranded (in conduit).

b. #10 or smaller conductors for circuits terminating at motors:

1) Where Exposed within Electrical Rooms OR Concealed in Wall/Ceiling Cavities (not concrete encased, etc.):

(a) THHN/THWN, XHHW or RHH/RHW/USE stranded (in conduit) or (b) Metal-Clad (MC) cabling with THHN/THWN stranded conductors (conduit not

required).

POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 51V-600V 26 05 19


2) Other Locations (where exposed outside electrical rooms or concrete encased): THHN/THWN, XHHW or RHH/RHW/USE stranded (in conduit).

c. #10 or smaller conductors (excluding circuits terminating at motors):

1) Where Exposed within Electrical Rooms OR Concealed in Wall/Ceiling Cavities (not concrete encased, etc.):

(a) THHN/THWN, XHHW or RHH/RHW/USE solid (in conduit) or (b) Metal-Clad (MC) cabling with THHN/THWN solid conductors (conduit not

required).

2) Other Locations (where exposed outside electrical rooms or concrete encased): THHN/THWN, XHHW or RHH/RHW/USE solid (in conduit).

d. Contractor may use non-metallic sheathed cable for concealed branch circuits where acceptable to the local authority having jurisdiction and where allowable by the NEC. The contractor shall verify where non-metallic sheathed cable is allowed with the local AHJ prior to start of work, and notify owner in writing of this discussion. Non-metallic sheathed cable shall not be installed above lay-in ceilings or in locations visible to the public.

3. Metal-Clad (MC) cabling shall be rated for redundant grounding where installed in patient care areas per N.E.C. Article 517.

4. Power Wire and cable shall be as manufactured by Southwire, Rome, American Insulated Wire, Okonite, Phelps-Dodge, Amercable, Aetna or approved equal.

D. Emergency Feeder Wiring

1. Where specifically required by NEC articles 700, 701, or other similar sections, feeder-circuit wiring for emergency systems and legally-required standby systems shall be a listed electrical circuit protective system consisting of 2-hour fire-rated, mineral insulated, copper-sheathed wiring cable (Pyrotenax System 1850 or equal).

E. Class 1 Control Cabling (120VAC Control Circuits, Etc.)

1. Unless specified otherwise, Class 1 control cabling shall:

a. Be rated for exposed cable tray installation. b. Be plenum rated. c. Be UL-rated for the proposed application. d. Be multi-conductor with overall outer sheath as required by the application. The

insulation of each conductor within the overall multi-conductor cable shall be uniquely color-coded. Ground conductors (when provided) within the multi-conductor cable shall have green insulation.

e. Utilize copper conductors. f. Have wire gauge as required to limit voltage drop to acceptable limits determined by the

system supplier and to meet all applicable code requirements. g. Where installed underground, within slab-on-grade or in exterior locations, be rated for

wet locations. h. Where required for specific systems, meet the specific requirements (conductor quantity,

wire gauge, insulation type, shielding, etc.) of the system supplier. i. Be rated for 600V. j. Be industrial grade. k. Have stranded conductors. l. Have sunlight/oil-resistant PVC/Nylon insulation and jacket with ripcord.



2. Control cabling shall be as manufactured by Belden, AlphaWire or General Cable.

F. Fixture Wiring

1. Conductor Types:

a. Type TFFN or XFF.

2. Minimum Sizes:

a. For fixtures up to 300 watts: #16. b. For fixtures over 300 watts up to 1500 watts: #14. c. For fixtures over 1500 watts: as required. d. Conductors to concrete pour fixtures: #12.

3. Fixture wire shall extend only from fixture to first junction, and not over 6 feet, except for concrete pour units.

2.02 WIRE CONNECTIONS:

A. All connector types:

1. Shall be properly rated for the proposed application by UL and per the manufacturer.

B. At Motor Connections (within motor terminal boxes):

1. On Unshielded Wire:

a. Single conductor per phase: shall be made with insulated set screw connectors or 3M 5300 Series 1kV Motor Lead Connections kits with mechanical lugs as required.

b. Multiple conductors per phase: shall be made with insulated mechanical lugs, rated for the associated motor cable types, by Polaris or Ilsco.

2. On Shielded Power Wire:

a. The braided shields and internal grounding conductors of shielded power (not instrumentation) cables shall be grounded at BOTH ends (at VFD/starter and at motor) with a termination kit provided by the cable supplier. This termination kit shall include a connection ring that makes contact around the full circumference of the braided shield, and connects all internal grounds to a common external ground point.

C. Other Dry locations:

1. On Wire larger than #10: shall be made with solderless, non-insulated compression-type connectors meeting requirements of Federal Specification WS-610e for Type II, Class 2 and shall be covered with Scotch #33 electrical tape so that insulation is equal to 150% of conductor insulation.

2. On Wire #10 and smaller: shall be made with one of the following:

a. Ideal Wing Nuts or equal by 3M . b. Ideal Push-In Wire Connectors (for #12 and smaller only).

D. Other Wet/Damp locations:



1. On Wire larger than #10: shall be made with underground/direct-burial, waterproof rated EPDM or TPE-insulated connectors by Ilsco, Burndy or T&B.

2. On Wire #10 and smaller: shall be made with one of the following:

a. Ideal Weatherproof or Underground Wire Connectors pre-filled with 100% silicone sealant as required by the application.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. All wires and cables shall be installed in conduit unless specifically noted otherwise.

B. Metal-clad (MC) cabling (not required to be installed within conduit) may be used for above-grade, concealed branch circuits where allowed by code. MC cable installation shall:

1. NOT be installed exposed except in electrical rooms. 2. be provided with dedicated neutrals for all multi-wire circuits. Conductors shall be color

coded as described below. 3. be run orthogonal with the building structure. 4. be supported per N.E.C. requirements. At a minimum MC cabling shall be supported on six

foot intervals and within 12” of all outlet/junction boxes. 5. be supported independently from the building structure and shall not come into contact with

other building systems (ductwork, piping, conduits, etc.). 6. be rated for redundant grounding where installed in patient care areas per N.E.C. Article 517.

C. All joints and splices on wire shall be made with solderless connectors, and covered so that insulation is equal to conductor insulation.

D. No splices shall be pulled into conduit.

E. No conductor shall be pulled until conduit is cleaned of all foreign matter.

F. Wire and cable shall be neatly formed, bundled and tied in all panelboards, wireways, disconnect switches, pullboxes, junction boxes, cabinets and other similar electrical enclosures.

G. All wires and cables installed in underground or other wet locations shall be rated by the manufacturer for wet locations.

H. Network cabling shall be continuous from endpoint to endpoint and shall not be spliced unless specifically noted otherwise.

3.02 POWER WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION:

A. No power conductor shall be smaller than #12 except where so designated on the drawings or hereinafter specified.

B. Multi-wire lighting branches shall be used as indicated.

C. Where more than three current-carrying conductors are installed in a single raceway or cable, conductors shall be derated as indicated in NEC Table 310.15(B)(3)(a).

D. Raceways/cables shall generally not be installed exposed to sunlight on roofs unless specifically required. Where raceways or cables are installed exposed to sunlight on roofs, conductors shall be derated with ampacities adjusted per NEC Table 310.15(B)(3)(c).



E. In installing parallel power conductors, it is mandatory that all conductors making up the feeder be exactly the same length, the same size, the same type of conductor with the same insulation. Each group of conductors making up a phase or neutral must be bonded at both ends in an approved manner.

F. In installing overhead main power services, a minimum of 5’-0” of cable per run shall be extended beyond the weatherhead(s) for connection to service drop. Confirm exact requirements with local utility company.

3.03 WIRE CONNECTIONS

A. See Part 2 above for material types.

B. Aluminum Wire Connections:

1. Where aluminum wiring is allowed, connections shall utilize compression fittings, no exceptions (Anderson Versa Crimp or equal).

C. Any stranded wire connection to wiring devices shall be made with crimp type terminals.

D. All electrical connections and terminals shall be tightened according to manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values with calibrated torque wrenches as required to clearly indicate final torque value to the contractor. Where manufacturer’s torque values are not provided, those specified in UL 486A & 486B shall be used.

E. All connections and connector types shall be installed in strict compliance with all requirements of the connector manufacturer.

F. Under no condition shall the specified conductors be connected to terminals rated less than 75°C. Where conductors sized #1 or smaller are shown to be terminated at equipment and the terminals of that equipment are rated for less than 75°C, contractor shall install junction box near equipment to capture the specified conductors, splice with compression connections (rated for a least 75°C) and extend conductors with ampacity rating as required by NEC (based on terminal temperature rating) to equipment terminals. The length of the conductors to be terminated shall be as directed by the AHJ but not less than 48 inches.

3.04 LOW VOLTAGE (LESS THAN 50V) CONTROL AND NETWORK CABLE INSTALLATION:

A. All wires and cables shall be installed in conduit unless specifically noted otherwise. Low voltage control and/or network cabling located within concealed, accessible ceiling spaces (such as above lay-in ceilings) may be run without conduit if the following requirements are met:

1. Cabling shall be plenum-rated, multi-conductor. 2. Cabling shall be supported by cable tray or with J-hook supports on intervals not to exceed

5’-0” on center. Cabling shall be supported solely from the cable tray or j-hooks supported from the building structure, without using piping, ductwork, conduit or other items as supports.

3. Cabling shall be properly bundled with plenum-rated Velcro straps on intervals not to exceed 30” on center.

4. Properly-sized conduit(s) shall be provided wherever cabling enters an inaccessible or exposed area (such as above gyp board ceilings or through walls). End bushings shall be provided on both ends of all raceway terminations. All fire/smoke barrier penetrations shall be made in accordance with a U.L. listed assembly.

3.05 CIRCUITS AND BRANCH CIRCUITS



A. Outlets shall be connected to branch circuits as indicated on drawings by circuit number adjacent to outlet symbols, and no more outlets than are indicated shall be connected to a circuit.

3.06 LABELING AND COLOR CODING OF WIRE AND CABLE

A. Refer to Specification Section 26 05 53 for all labeling requirements.

B. A color coding system as listed below shall be followed throughout the network of branch power circuits as follows:

PHASE

120/208/240/ COLOR

120/240 HIGH LEG DELTA COLOR

277/480 VOLT COLOR

A BLACK BLACK BROWN B RED ORANGE (FOR HI-

LEG) ORANGE

C BLUE BLUE YELLOW NEUTRAL WHITE WHITE GRAY GROUND GREEN GREEN GREEN

C. Where dedicated neutrals are installed for multi-wire branch circuits, the neutral conductors shall be color coded as follows:

PHASE

120/208/240/ COLOR

120/240 HIGH LEG DELTA COLOR

277/480 VOLT COLOR

NEUTRAL A WHITE W/

BLACK TRACER

WHITE W/ BLACK TRACER

GRAY W/ BROWN TRACER

NEUTRAL B WHITE W/ RED TRACER

WHITE W/ ORANGE TRACER (FOR HI-LEG NEUTRAL)

GRAY W/ ORANGE TRACER

NEUTRAL C WHITE W/ BLUE TRACER

WHITE W/ BLUE TRACER

GRAY W/ YELLOW TRACER

D. Control Conductors: Shall be color coded by use of colored “tracers”. No control circuit shall contain two identical conductors. For example, a set of five (5) control conductors for a pushbutton station represents one (1) control circuit which would require five (5) uniquely-colored control conductors.

3.07 TESTING

A. The insulation resistance of all feeder conductors (feeding electrical distribution equipment such as switchboards, panelboards, transfer switches, transformers, etc.) shall be tested at the load side of the feeder breaker with a 500-volt DC Megger Tester. Any feeder conductor with an insulation resistance less than 1 Mega ohm to ground shall be replaced by the contractor at the contractor’s expense. All final test results shall be clearly documented (with date, time, feeder, results, test equipment, etc.), and the final test results shall be submitted to the design team for review.


SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING


PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL

A. THE WORK UNDER THIS SECTION INCLUDES BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO GROUNDING OF THE FOLLOWING:

1. Service Equipment. 2. Transformers. 3. Non-current carrying conductive surfaces of equipment. 4. Metal Buildings. 5. Structures. 6. Other Equipment.

1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. All equipment, building steel, and main service shall be effectively and permanently grounded with a conductor cross section as required by the National Electrical Code and of capacity sufficient to insure continued effectiveness of the ground connections for fault current. Ground conductors shall be as short and straight as possible, protected from mechanical injury and, if practicable, without splice or joint.

B. All grounding connections shall be installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code and all local codes and requirements. Such codes shall be considered minimum requirements and the installation of the grounding system shall insure freedom from dangerous shock voltage exposure and provide a low impedance ground fault path to permit proper operation of overcurrent and ground fault protective devices.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUCTORS

A. All grounding conductors shall be insulated with green colored, 600 volt insulation unless noted otherwise.

B. Motors having power supplied by single conductor wire in conduit shall be grounded through the conduit system. Flexible conduit shall be “jumpered” by an appropriate bonding conductor.

2.02 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Grounding electrodes shall be copper-clad steel rods 3/4 inch in diameter and ten feet long. Where longer electrodes are necessary to reduce the ground resistance, Contractor shall provide sectional rods, connectors, drive heads, etc.

2.03 CONNECTIONS

A. All conductor-to-conductor, conductor-to-ground rod, conductor-to-structure, conductor-to-fence connections of #6 and larger sized conductors and underground ground connections shall be permanent exothermic welded connections (Cadweld or equal) unless otherwise noted on

GROUNDING 26 05 26


applicable drawings.

B. Connections to equipment shall be by bolted compression type lugs (except for motors). When the conductor is #6 and larger, the lug shall be joined to the conductor by an exothermic weld (Cadweld or equal).

C. Motors to be grounded by the grounding conductors run with the power conductors shall have a split-post grounding stud installed in the connection box.

D. Each cast pull box or junction box shall have a ground lug, connected to largest ground conductor to enter box.

E. Ground connections at conduit terminations shall be made by approved grounding bushings (see Raceways Specification Section for additional requirements).

2.04 MANUFACTURERS

A. Conduit clamps and connectors shall be manufactured by Raco, OZ., or Ercon.

B. Lugs shall be as manufactured by Square “D”, Burndy, or T and B.

C. Exothermic weld connections shall be as manufactured by Cadweld, or approved equal.

D. Ground rods shall be as manufactured by Joslyn or McGraw Edison.

E. Split post grounding shall be as manufactured by Burndy or T and B.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 MAIN SERVICE GROUND

A. The main service grounding electrode system shall consist of the following items bonded together by the grounding electrode conductor:

1. The main underground cold water pipe (metal). 2. The metal frame of the building. 3. Driven ground rods. Ground rods shall be embedded at the lowest point in the building and

below the permanent moisture level. Ground rods shall be spaced a minimum of ten (10) feet apart and connected in parallel until resistance to ground does not exceed five (5) ohms.

B. The grounding electrode system shall be connected to the grounded conductor (neutral) on the supply side of the service disconnecting means by a grounding electrode conductor not smaller than that shown in Table 250.66 of the N.E.C. The main service equipment grounding conductor shall be connected to the grounding conductor on the supply side of the service disconnecting means in accordance with Table 250.122 of the N.E.C. for the ampere rating of the service entrance equipment. Where in a service entrance switchboard, the equipment grounding conductor shall not be less than 25% of the main bus rating. These connections shall be made inside the service entrance equipment enclosure.

3.02 TRANSFORMER GROUNDS

A. Dry type insulation transformers with a grounded conductor in the secondary shall be grounded in accordance with N.E.C. Section 250-26.

3.03 EXPOSED NON-CURRENT-CARRYING METAL PARTS

GROUNDING 26 05 26


A. General: Ground connections to equipment or devices shall be made as close to the current carrying parts as possible, that is, to the main frame rather than supporting structures, bases or shields. Grounding connections shall be made only to dry surfaces that are clean and dry. Steel surfaces shall be ground or filed to remove all scales, rust, grease, and dirt. Copper and galvanized steel shall be cleaned to remove oxide before making welds or connections. Code size ground conductors shall be run in all power conduits and properly terminated at each end.

B. Motors: Exposed non-current-carrying metal parts, shall be grounded by a grounding conductor either run with power conductors, and/or separate grounding conductors. Drawings will show method(s) to be used. The ground conductors with all motor conductors shall be connected to the ground buss in the motor connection box. Jumper connections shall be installed between frames and rigid conduit for equipment having flexible conduit connections (sealtight). All AC motor grounds shall provide a low impedance path to ground.

C. Raceways & boxes: All raceways, conduits, armored or shielded cable and all exposed non-current carrying metal parts shall be grounded. Such items shall be bonded together and permanently grounded to the equipment ground buss. Metallic conduits shall be connected by grounding or clamps to ground buss. Flexible “jumpers” shall be provided around all raceway expansion joints. Bonding straps for steel conduit shall be copper. Jumper connections shall be provided to effectively ground all sections or rigid conduit connected into plastic pipe. No metallic conduit shall be left ungrounded. In conduit systems interrupted by junction or switch boxes where locknuts and bushings are used to secure the conduit in the box, the sections of conduit and box must be bonded together. If conduit, couplings or fittings have a protective coating or non-conductive material, such as enamel, such coating must be thoroughly removed from threads of both couplings and conduit and the surface of conduit or fitting where the ground clamp is secured.

D. Enclosures: Metal conduits entering free standing motor control centers, switchboards or other free standing equipment shall be grounded by bare conductors and approved clamp. Any conduits entering low voltage (480 volts or below) equipment through sheet metal enclosure and effectively grounded to enclosure by double locknut or hub need not be otherwise bonded.

E. Equipment: In addition to equipment grounding provisions mandated by code requirements, additional equipment grounding provisions (including local ground rods, connections, etc.) shall be provided by the contractor as directed by equipment suppliers.

F. Both ends of ground busses in motor control centers, switchboards, etc., shall be separately connected to the main ground buss to form two separate paths to ground.

G. Fences and Grills: Fences and metal grills around equipment carrying voltage above 500 volts between phases shall be bonded together and to ground. Fences and grill work shall be grounded at every post, column, or support, and on each side of every gate.

3.04 ACCEPTANCE DOCUMENTATION AND TESTING

A. Contractor shall take and store photographs of all underground grounding system connections prior to burial of connections, for review by Engineer.

B. Upon completion of work, the entire ground system shall be shown to be in perfect working condition, in accordance with the intent of the Specifications.

C. Contractor shall measure the resistance between the main ground bonding jumper to true earth ground using the Fall of Potential method as described by ANSI/IEEE Standard 81 (“Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of an Earth System”). If the measured value is greater than five ohms, additional grounding electrodes shall be installed as described in Part 3.1 above. The final ground resistance value shall be submitted

GROUNDING 26 05 26


in writing, and documented via picture of the meter reading from the Fall of Potential test, to the Architect prior to the final observation, and shall be included in final O&M documentation.


SECTION 26 05 33

RACEWAYS


PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. THE WORK UNDER THIS SECTION INCLUDES BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO THE FOLLOWING:

1. Conduits 2. Conduit Fittings 3. Couplings & Connectors 4. Bushings 5. Raceway Hardware, Conduit Clamps & Supports 6. Watertight Entrance Seal Devices

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUITS

A. Rigid Galvanized Steel and I.M.C.:

1. Shall be galvanized outside and inside by hot dipping. 2. Shall be as manufactured by Republic, Wheatland, Triangle, Pittsburg Standard,

Youngstown, Allied or equal.

B. E.M.T.:

1. Shall be Electro-Galvanized. 2. Shall be as manufactured by Republic, Wheatland, Triangle, Pittsburg Standard,


C. Rigid Aluminum:

1. Shall be manufactured of 6063 Alloy, T-1 temper. 2. Shall be as manufactured by Republic, Wheatland, Triangle, Pittsburg Standard,


D. Schedule 40 and 80 PVC:

1. Shall be composed of polyvinyl chloride and shall be U.L. rated type 40 or 80 for use with 90 degree rated conductors. Conduit shall conform to NEMA Standards and applicable sections of N.E.C.

2. The conduit manufacturer shall have had a minimum of 5 years experience in the manufacture of the products. Non-metallic raceways shall be as manufactured by Carlon, Triangle, Can-Tex, Allied or equal.

E. HDPE Innerduct

1. Shall be composed high density polyethylene and shall be orange in color, unless noted otherwise.

2. Shall be corrugated unless noted otherwise.

RACEWAYS 26 05 33


3. Shall be manufactured by Carlon, Ipex or equal.

F. Flexible Metallic Conduit:

1. Shall be continuous spiral wound and interlocked galvanized material, code approved for grounding.

G. Liquidtight Flexible Metallic Conduit:

1. Shall be galvanized steel-core sealtite, code approved for grounding. 2. Shall have an outer liquidtight, nonmetallic, sunlight-resistant jacket over an inner flexible

metal core. 3. Shall be as manufactured by Electric-Flex, Anaconda or equal.

2.02 FITTINGS, COUPLINGS & CONNECTORS

A. Rigid Galvanized Steel and I.M.C. couplings and connectors shall be standard threaded type, galvanized outside and inside by hot dipping. Threadless and clamp type are not acceptable. Couplings/connectors shall be as manufactured by Raco, Efcor, or Appleton or equal.

B. All rain tight connectors shall be threaded Myers or approved equal, rated for outdoor application.

C. E.M.T. couplings and connectors shall be set screw, or steel compression type. All couplings and connectors shall be 720B, 730, 750B, or 760 series of Efcor or equal series of Raco. Pressure indented type connectors or cast metal will not be approved for any location. E.M.T. couplings and connectors shall be as manufactured by O-Z/Gedney, T&B, Efcor, Raco, Midwest or equal. E.M.T. fittings, couplings and connectors located within concrete (where allowed) shall be compression type and shall be adequately sealed with tape to ensure a concrete-tight seal.

D. Rigid Aluminum couplings and connectors shall be standard threaded type, of the same alloy as the associated conduit. Threadless and clamp type are not acceptable. Fittings shall be as manufactured by Thomas & Betts, Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, Pyle-National or equal.

E. All PVC couplings, adapters, end bells, reducers, etc., shall be of same material as conduit.

F. Liquidtight Flexible Metallic Conduit connectors shall be steel-core liquidtight with insulating throat or end bushing, designed for application with Liquidtight Flexible Metallic Conduit. Fittings shall be as manufactured by Efcor, Raco, Midwest or equal.

G. All LB unilets shall have rollers.

H. Miscellaneous conduit fittings shall be as manufactured by Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, Pyle-National, Russell & Stoll or equal.

2.03 BUSHINGS

A. All non-grounding rigid bushings 1-1/4” and larger shall be the insulating type (O-Z/Gedney type “BB” or equal by T&B, Midwest Electric or Penn Union).

B. All non-grounding rigid bushings 1” and smaller shall be threaded malleable iron with integral noncombustible insulator rated for 150°C. Non-grounding rigid conduit bushings shall be O-Z/Gedney type “B” or equal by T&B, Midwest Electric or Penn Union.

C. All grounding rigid bushings shall be threaded malleable iron with integral noncombustible insulator rated for 150°C. All grounding rigid conduit bushings shall be O-Z/Gedney type “BLG”

RACEWAYS 26 05 33


or equal by T&B, Midwest Electric or Penn Union.

2.04 HARDWARE, CONDUIT CLAMPS AND SUPPORTS

A. All hardware such as expansion shields, machine screws, toggle bolts, “U” or “J” bolts, machine bolts, conduit clamps and supports shall be of corrosion resistant materials (stainless steel, aluminum, galvanized or plated steel, or other approved materials).

B. Hardware in contact with aluminum handrails, plates or structural members and all hardware in exterior, wet or corrosive areas shall be type 316 stainless steel or aluminum (with bitumastic paint coating to isolate aluminum from contact with concrete where necessary) unless specifically noted otherwise.

C. Supports in exterior, wet or corrosive locations shall be type 316 stainless steel or aluminum (with bitumastic paint coating to isolate aluminum from contact with concrete where necessary) unless specifically noted otherwise.

D. Supports in extremely corrosive environments (such as chlorine or fluoride storage rooms) shall be PVC-Coated steel unless specifically noted otherwise.

E. Hardware and conduit clamps shall be as manufactured by Efcor, Steel City, G.A., Tinnerman or equal.

2.05 WATERTIGHT ENTRANCE SEAL DEVICES

A. For new construction, seal devices shall consist of oversized sleeve and malleable iron body with sealing rings, pressure rings, sealing grommets and pressure clamps as required (O-Z/Gedney type FSK/WSK or equal).

B. For cored-hole applications, seal devices shall consist of assembled dual pressure disks with neoprene sealing rings and membrane clamps as required (O-Z/Gedney type CSM or equal).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Minimum Diameter: 1/2-inch.

B. Raceway Type: Raceway types shall be as specified below, unless indicated otherwise on drawings:

1. Exterior, Exposed: Rigid Galvanized Steel or I.M.C. unless otherwise noted. 2. Other Exterior (Concrete-Encased or Direct Earth Buried): Schedule 40 PVC. PVC conduit

shall convert to metallic conduit prior to exiting concrete-encasement or direct earth burial. See “transition” items below for additional requirements. Conduits shall be left exposed until after Architect’s observation.

3. Interior, Exposed:

a. Hazardous Locations: Rigid Galvanized Steel . b. Wet Locations (including, but not limited to, Pump Rooms, Wet Wells, Underground

Vaults, and other similar locations): Rigid Galvanized Steel or I.M.C. . c. Dry Locations Where Subject to Mechanical Damage (including, but not limited to, below

10’-0” A.F.F. in shop, storage, warehouse and other similar areas): Rigid Galvanized Steel or I.M.C..

RACEWAYS 26 05 33


d. Extremely Corrosive Locations (Chlorine Storage Rooms, Fluoride Storage Rooms and other similar areas): Schedule 80 PVC.

e. Other Dry Locations: E.M.T.

4. Interior, Concealed:

a. Embedded inside Poured Concrete Walls, Ceilings or Floors, with a minimum of 2” of concrete between finished surface and outer wall of conduit on all sides, where no anchor bolts, screws or other similar items will be installed: Schedule 40 PVC. PVC conduit shall convert to metallic conduit (exact type as specified elsewhere within this section) prior to exiting poured concrete-encasement of wall, ceiling, floor or ductbank. See “transition” items below for additional requirements.

b. Other Raceways Embedded inside Poured Concrete Walls, Ceilings or Floors (not meeting requirements above): Rigid Galvanized Steel or I.M.C. (coated with two coats of asphaltum paint where below grade or within concrete).

c. Other Raceways: E.M.T.

5. Terminations at motors, transformers and other equipment which has moving or vibrating parts:

a. Exterior or Wet Locations (including, but not limited to, Pump Rooms, Wet Wells, Underground Vaults, and other similar locations): Liquidtight Flexible Metallic Conduit (shall generally not exceed 24 inches in length) with watertight fittings.

b. Dry, Interior Locations: Flexible Metallic Conduit (shall generally not exceed 24 inches in length).

6. Terminations at fixtures mounted in grid-type ceilings:

a. Flexible Metallic Conduit or MC cabling (shall generally not exceed 72 inches in length and shall run from junction box to fixture, not from fixture to fixture).

7. Transition from underground or concrete-encased to exposed:

a. Convert PVC to Rigid Galvanized Steel (coated with two (2) coats of asphaltum paint) utilizing Rigid Galvanized Steel 90 degree bends (and vertical conduits as required by application) prior to exiting concrete/grade (except at outdoor pull boxes and under freestanding electrical equipment, where terminations shall be by PVC end bells installed flush with top of slab). Exposed portions of these coated conduits shall extend a minimum of 6” above floor level, and shall be installed at uniform heights.

3.02 RACEWAY INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Follow methods which are appropriate and approved for the location and conditions involved. Where not otherwise shown, specified, or approved in a particular case, run all wiring concealed.

2. Where conduit crosses a structural expansion joint an approved conduit expansion fitting shall be installed.

3. A non-conductive polypropylene pull string, properly tied/secured at either end, shall be installed in all empty conduits.

4. Metal conduit field-cuts shall be cut square with a hacksaw and the ends reamed after threading.

5. PVC conduit field-cuts shall be made with hacksaw, and ends shall be deburred. 6. All PVC joints shall be made as follows:

RACEWAYS 26 05 33


a. Clean the outside of the conduit to depth of the socket, and the inside of socket with an approved cleaner.

b. Apply solvent cement as recommended by the conduit manufacturer to the interior of the socket and exterior of conduit, making sure to coat all surfaces to be joined.

c. Insert conduit into the socket and rotate 1/4 to 1/2 turn and allow to dry.

7. All metallic conduit installed below grade or within concrete shall be painted with two (2) coats of asphaltum paint prior to installation.

8. Install ground wire sized per N.E.C. Table 250.122 in all conduits. 9. Use of running threads is absolutely prohibited. Conduit shall be jointed with approved

threaded conduit couplings. Threadless and clamp type not acceptable. 10. Conduits shall be sized in accordance with latest National Electrical Code except when size

shown on drawings. 1/2-inch conduit shall not contain conductors larger than No. 12 or more than four (4) No. 12 conductors.

11. Exposed, field-cut threads on all metal conduits shall be painted with zinc primer (for Galvanized Rigid or I.M.C.) .

B. Routing/Locating:

1. Exposed conduit runs shall be run level and plumb and shall, on interior of buildings, be run parallel and/or at right angles to building walls and/or partitions.

2. Conduit with an external diameter larger than 1/3 the thickness of a concrete slab shall not be placed in the slab. Conduits in slab shall not be spaced closer than 3 diameters on center.

3. Conduit run in ceiling spaces shall be run as high as possible, all at same level, and shall be supported from building structure. Do not support conduit from any other installation.

4. Install conduit runs to avoid proximity to steam or hot water pipes. In no place shall a conduit be run within 6” of such pipes except where crossing is unavoidable, then conduit shall be kept at least 3” from the covering of the pipe crossed.

5. Before installing raceways for motors, HVAC equipment and other fixed equipment, check location of all equipment connections/terminal boxes with equipment supplier and locate and arrange raceways appropriately.

6. A minimum of 12” of clearance shall be provided between the finished lines of exterior, underground conduit runs and exterior, underground utilities (gas, water, sewer, etc.).

C. Bends:

1. Do not make bends (in any raceway, including flexible conduits) that exceed allowable conductor bending radius of cable to be installed or that significantly restrict conductor flexibility.

2. All bends within concrete-encased ductbanks installed in exterior locations shall be long radius bends (24” minimum bending radius – varies with conduit diameter).

3. Where numerous exposed bends or grouped together, all bends shall be parallel, with same center and shall be similar in appearance

4. All PVC elbows, bends, etc., shall be either factory bends or made with an approved heat bender.

D. Support:

1. Anchor conduit securely in place by means of approved conduit clamps, hangers, supports and fastenings. Arrangement and methods of fastening all conduits shall be subject to Engineer’s direction and approval. All conduits shall be rigidly supported (wire supports may not be used in any location). Use only approved clamps on exposed conduit.

2. Conduit in riser shafts shall be supported at each floor level by approved clamp hangers. 3. Right angle beam clamps and U bolts shall be specially formed and sized to snugly fit the

outside diameters of conduits.

RACEWAYS 26 05 33


4. Where installed in seismic zones, suspended raceways shall be braced in two (2) directions as required to prevent swaying and excessive movement.

5. Raceways installed on top of flat roofing shall be supported a minimum of 3 ½” above roof with rubber block supports (Cooper B-Line Dura-Blok or equal). Installation shall be in strict accordance with support manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.

E. Terminations:

1. All conduit connections to sheet metal cabinets or enclosures located in exterior or wet locations shall terminate by use of rain tight hubs.

2. Where rigid or I.M.C. conduits enter sheet metal boxes, they shall be secured by approved lock nuts and bushings.

3. Where metal conduits enter outdoor pull boxes, manholes, under freestanding electrical equipment or other locations where direct metal-to-metal contact does not exist between enclosure and conduit, grounding bushings shall be installed. Each grounding bushing shall be connected to the enclosure ground and all other grounding bushings with properly sized grounding conductors.

4. Where E.M.T. enters sheet metal boxes they shall be secured in place with approved insulating fittings.

5. Where PVC enters outdoor pull boxes, manholes or under freestanding electrical equipment, PVC end bells shall be installed.

6. Where conduit terminates in free air such that associated cabling/circuitry becomes exposed (such as at cable trays, etc.), conduit shall generally terminate in a horizontal orientation (to prevent dust/debris/etc. from entering conduit system). Where vertical conduit termination is necessary, the termination shall be provided with cord-grip conduit terminations to seal the conduit system.

7. Conduit ends shall be carefully plugged during construction. 8. Permanent, removable caps or plugs shall be installed on each end of all empty raceways

with fittings listed to prevent water and other foreign matter from entering the conduit system.

F. Penetrations:

1. All fire/smoke barrier penetrations shall be made in accordance with a U.L. listed assembly. Refer to drawings and other specifications for additional requirements.

2. All penetrations shall be at right angles unless shown otherwise. 3. Structural members (including footings and beams) shall not be notched or penetrated for

the installation of electrical raceways unless noted otherwise without specific approval of the structural engineer.

4. Dry-packed non-shrink grout or watertight seal devices shall be used to seal openings around conduits at all penetrations through concrete walls, ceilings or aboveground floors.

5. All raceways entering structures shall be sealed (at the first box or outlet) with polyurethane grout compound that expands to form a flexible foam seal that prevents the entrance of gases or liquids from one area to another (Prime Resins Prime-Flex or equal).

6. All raceways passing through concrete roofs or membrane-waterproofed walls or floors shall be provided with watertight seals as follows:

a. Where ducts are concrete encased on one side: Install watertight entrance seal device on the accessible side of roof/wall/floor as directed by equipment manufacturer.

b. Where ducts are accessible on both sides: Install watertight entrance seal device on each side of roof/wall/floor as directed by equipment manufacturer.

7. All raceways passing through walls of rooms containing/storing noxious chemicals (chlorine, ammonia, etc.) or through hazardous locations shall be sealed with conduit seals (Crouse-Hinds type EYS or equal).

RACEWAYS 26 05 33


8. All raceways terminating into electrical enclosures/devices/panels/etc. located in hazardous locations shall be sealed with conduit seals (Crouse-Hinds type EYS, EZS or equal) within 18” of the termination.

G. Exterior Electrical Ductbanks:

1. Where exterior electrical concrete-encased ductbanks are indicated on drawings, conduit runs between buildings or structures shall be grouped in concrete-encased ductbanks as follows:

a. A minimum of 3” of concrete shall encase each side of all ductbanks. b. A minimum of 1 ½” of separation shall be provided between each conduit within

ductbanks. PVC spacers shall be installed at the necessary intervals prior to placement of concrete to maintain the required spacing and to prevent bending or displacement of the conduits.

c. Top of concrete shall be a minimum of 30” below grade. A continuous magnetic marking tape shall be buried directly above each ductbank, 12” below grade.

d. Exact routing of ductbanks shall be field verified and shall be modified as necessary to avoid obstruction or conflicts.

e. Underground electrical raceways shall be installed to meet the minimum cover requirements listed in NEC Table 300.5. Refer to drawings for more stringent requirements.


SECTION 26 05 34

OUTLET BOXES, JUNCTION BOXES, WIREWAYS


PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Outlet and Junction Boxes

B. Pull Boxes

C. Wireways

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 OUTLET BOXES & JUNCTION BOXES (THROUGH 4-11/16”)

A. Sheet Metal: Shall be standard type with knockouts made of hot dipped galvanized steel as manufactured by Steel City, Raco, Appleton, Bowers or equal.

B. Cast: Shall be type FS, FD, JB, GS, or SEH as required for application as manufactured by O-Z/Gedney, Appleton, or equal.

C. Nonmetallic: Shall be type Polycarbonate/ABS construction as required for application with non-metallic quick-release latches as manufactured by Hoffman, O-Z/Gedney, Appleton, or equal.

2.02 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES (LARGER THAN 4-11/16”)

A. Oil-Tight JIC: Shall be Hoffman Type CH box or approved equal.

B. Galvanized Cast Iron or Cast Aluminum: Shall be O-Z/Gedney or approved equal.

C. Stainless Steel: Shall be as manufactured by O-Z/Gedney, Hoffman or approved equal. Boxes shall have continuous hinges, seamless foam-in-place gaskets and screw-down clamps.

D. Nonmetallic: Shall be type Polycarbonate/ABS construction as required for application with non-metallic quick-release latches as manufactured by Hoffman, O-Z/Gedney, Appleton, or equal.

E. Wireways: Shall be standard manufacturer’s item as manufactured by Hoffman, Square “D”, Burns, B & C or equal.

F. Pre-cast Polymer Concrete Below-Grade Hand Holes & Pull Boxes:

1. Enclosures, boxes and cover are required to be UL Listed and conform to all test provisions of ANSI/SCTE 77 “Specifications For Underground Enclosure Integrity” for Tier 15 applications (15,000lb design load and 22,500lb test load) unless noted otherwise.

2. All covers shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.05 in accordance with ASTM C1028 and the corresponding Tier level shall be embossed on the top surface.

3. Cover shall be bolt-down include factory-labeling to read “Electric”, “Communications” or other as directed.

4. Hardware shall be stainless steel. 5. Shall be Quazite PG/LG Style or approved equal.

OUTLET BOXES, JUNCTION BOXES, WIREWAYS 26 05 34


G. Galvanized Cast Iron Below-Grade Pull Boxes:

1. Enclosures, boxes and cover are required to conform to AASHTO H-20 requirements for deliberate vehicular traffic applications unless noted otherwise.

2. Cover shall be checkered, bolt-down include factory-labeling to read “Electric”, “Communications” or other as directed.

3. Hardware shall be stainless steel. 4. Shall be furnished with grounding kit. 5. Shall be O-Z/Gedney Type YR or approved equal.

a.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATION

A. General

1. All boxes and wireways shall be of sufficient size to provide free space for all enclosed conductors per NEC requirements. Fill calculations shall be performed by contractor per NEC requirements.

B. Outlet Boxes & Junction Boxes (through 4-11/16”)

1. Sheet metal boxes shall be used on concealed work in ceiling or walls and exposed work in dry, interior locations.

2. Cast boxes shall be used wherever Rigid or I.M.C. conduits are installed. 3. All boxes installed in extremely corrosive areas (such as chlorine and fluoride storage

rooms) where non-metallic raceways are used shall be non-metallic. 4. Except when located in exposed concrete block, switch and receptacle boxes shall be 4"

square for single gang installation. Appropriate gang boxes shall be used for mounting ganged switches.

5. When installed in exposed concrete block, switch and receptacle boxes shall be square type designed for exposed block installation.

6. Ceiling outlet boxes shall be 4" octagon 1-1/2" deep or larger required due to number of wires.

7. Boxes installed in hazardous locations shall be explosion-proof rated for the associated application, constructed of copper-free cast aluminum.

C. Junction & Pull Boxes (larger than 4-11/16”)

1. For all below grade exterior use and elsewhere as shown:

a. In areas subject to future vehicular traffic: shall be galvanized cast iron (rated AASHTO H-20 Loading unless noted otherwise).

b. In areas not subject to vehicular traffic: shall be galvanized cast iron or pre-cast polymer concrete (rated for Tier 15 Loading unless noted otherwise).

2. All boxes installed exposed in exterior or wet areas shall be powder-coated galvanized steel (NEMA 3R).

3. All boxes installed exposed in corrosive areas shall be stainless steel (NEMA 4X). 4. All boxes installed in extremely corrosive areas (such as chlorine and fluoride storage

rooms) where non-metallic raceways are used shall be non-metallic. 5. Boxes installed in hazardous locations shall be explosion-proof rated for the associated

application, constructed of copper-free cast aluminum. 6. All others shall be oil tight JIC box not less than 16 gauge.

OUTLET BOXES, JUNCTION BOXES, WIREWAYS 26 05 34


3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. All boxes and wireways shall be securely anchored. 2. All boxes shall be properly sealed and protected during construction and shall be cleaned of

all foreign matter before conductors are installed. 3. All boxes and wireways shall be readily accessible. Contractor shall be responsible for

furnishing and installing access panels as directed by the architect as required to make boxes and wireways accessible where above gypsum board ceilings or in other similar locations.

4. All metallic boxes and wireways shall be properly grounded. 5. Refer to Specification Section 26 05 53 for identification requirements.

B. Outlet Boxes & Junction Boxes (through 4-11/16”)

1. Boxes shall be provided with approved 3/8" fixture studs were required. 2. Recessed boxes for wiring devices, surface fixtures, or connections, shall be set so that the

edge of cover comes flush with finished surface. 3. There shall be no more knockouts opened in any sheet metal box than actually used. 4. Any unused opening in cast boxes shall be plugged. 5. Back to back boxes to be staggered at least 3 inches. 6. Under no circumstances shall through-the-wall boxes be used.

C. Junction & Pull Boxes (larger than 4-11/16”)

1. Pull boxes shall be installed as indicated on plans and/or as required due to number of bends, distance or pulling conditions.

2. Boxes to be imbedded in concrete shall be properly leveled and anchored in place before the concrete is poured.

3. All pull boxes and/or junction boxes installed exterior below grade, shall have their tops a minimum of 1-1/2 inches above surrounding grade and sloped so that water will not stand on lid. A positive drain shall be installed, to prevent water accumulation inside.

4. Above grade pull boxes shall be installed on concrete anchor bases as shown on Plans.

D. Wireways and/or wall-mounted equipment

1. Mount each wireway to channels of the same metal type as the wireway. 2. Conductors serving a wireway shall be extended without reduction in size, for the entire

length of the wireway. Tap-offs to switches and other items served by the wireway shall be made with ILSCO type GTA with GTC cap.


SECTION 26 05 53

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION


PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Wire and cable identification.

B. Pullbox & Junction Box Identification

C. Electrical distribution & utilization equipment identification.

D. Emergency and Standby Power receptacle identification.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 WIRE AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION

A. Intermediate Locations:

1. Wires and cable labels shall be white, thermal transfer, halogen-free, flame-retardant marker plates (sized to accommodate three lines of text) permanently affixed to the associated cable with UV-resistant plastic wire ties. Labels shall be Panduit #M200X/300X series or equal.

B. Circuit/Cable Termination Locations:

1. Wires and cable labels shall be non-ferrous identifying tags or pressure sensitive labels unless noted otherwise.

2.02 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION & UTILIZATION EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Labels on electrical distribution & utilization equipment shall be black-on-white engraved Bakelite nameplates permanently affixed to the equipment with rivets or silicone adhesive unless noted otherwise.

B. Labels on electrical distribution equipment fed from emergency or legally-required standby sources (such as emergency generators) shall be white-on-red engraved Bakelite nameplates permanently affixed to the equipment with rivets or silicone adhesive.

2.03 EMERGENCY AND STANDBY POWER RECEPTACLE IDENTIFICATION

A. Receptacles fed from emergency or standby power sources (such as emergency generators) shall be provided with factory-marked engraved coverplates as follows:

1. Emergency System source: Red engraved lettering to read “EMERGENCY”. 2. Legally-Required or Optional Standby Generator source:

a. If only part of facility is fed with generator backup: Black engraved lettering to read “FED FROM GENERATOR”.

b. If entire facility is fed with generator backup: No “….GENERATOR…” label required.

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 05 53


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Any proposed deviation in identification methods and materials from those described herein shall be submitted to Architect for review and comment prior to installation.

B. Contractor shall provide all labeling or identification required by applicable local, state and national codes. These specifications do not intend to itemize all code-required labeling or identification requirements.

C. All labels/identification shall be positioned such as to be readable from the normal perspective without adjusting wiring/cables/labels. For example, labels/identification of wires/cables within cable trays shall be positioned to point towards the viewer (typically downward for overhead cable trays, or upward for cable trays within trenches).

D. All labels/identification (except for handwritten labels on concealed pullbox/junction box covers as noted below) shall be typewritten/printed/engraved in a neat, workmanlike, permanent, legible, consistent and meaningful manner. Labels shall not be handwritten unless specific approval is granted by engineer.

3.02 WIRE AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION

A. General:

1. Where cabling is exposed (such as within cable trays), provide two wire ties per cable (one on either end of marker plate to provide a flush installation). Where cabling is concealed (such as within pullboxes/wireways), one wire tie per cable will be acceptable.

B. Intermediate Locations:

1. Thermal transfer labels shall be securely fastened to all wiring and cabling in the following locations:

a. Wireways b. Pullboxes/Junction boxes larger than 4-11/16” c. Pullboxes/Junction boxes through 4-11/16” where wires and cables are not easily

identifiable via the color coding and box labeling d. Vaults & Manholes e. Approximately every 50 feet within cable trays (especially at locations where cables exit

or diverge). Labels within cable trays shall be grouped (rather than being pre-labeled on cables and pulled into cable trays).

f. Other similar intermediate locations.

2. Labels shall be stamped or printed with the following data so that the feeder or cable can be readily identified and traced:

a. From where the circuit originates (including panel designation and circuit number):

1) Ex: “FROM: PP-A CIR. 3 (IN MAIN ELEC ROOM)”

b. To where the circuit extends (using the common name of the equipment):

1) Ex: “TO: RTU-6 (ON ROOF)”



c. The purpose of the circuit:

1) Ex: “POWER”

d. The set number (If parallel power feeds are used).

1) Ex: “SET NO. 3 OF 4”

C. Circuit/Cable Termination Locations:

1. Where multiple termination points exist within a circuit origination point (panelboard, switchboard, MCC, starter, etc.) or other similar circuit endpoint (control panel, etc.), labels shall be securely fastened to all ungrounded and neutral conductors to clearly identify the terminal and/or circuit number associated with each conductor. For example, within lighting panels, each phase and neutral conductor shall be labeled near the terminals at a clearly visible location with the associated circuit number(s), so that if all conductors were unterminated, the labels would clearly indicate which conductor was associated with each circuit.

D. Refer to Specification Section 26 05 19 for all color-coding requirements of wires and cables.

3.03 PULLBOX & JUNCTION BOX IDENTIFICATION

A. Concealed pullboxes/junction boxes:

1. Front surface of all pullbox/junction box covers in concealed areas (such as above lay-in ceilings) or within mechanical/electrical rooms (and other similar areas where appearance of boxes is not an issue) shall be neatly marked with the ID of circuits/cables contained with permanent black marker on cover of box (Ex: “RP-1A Cir. 1, 2 & 3”). Additionally, front surface of box shall be painted red where box contains fire alarm system cabling.

B. Exposed pullboxes/junction boxes:

1. Interior surface of all pullbox/junction box covers in exposed areas shall be labeled “Power”, “Telecommunications”, “Fire Alarm” or with other similar general text neatly with permanent black marker to indicate function of box. Circuit/cable labeling within box (see above) shall identify specific cables contained. Additionally, interior surface of cover shall be painted red where box contains fire alarm system cabling.

C. Where pullboxes/junction boxes are named on contract documents (Ex:”PULLBOX #3”), an engraved nameplate shall be installed on the front surface of the box to identify the name.

3.04 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION & UTILIZATION EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. General:

1. All new and existing equipment modified by this project shall include arc-flash warning labels in accordance with NEC article 110.16.

B. All Panels, Motor Control Centers, Switchboards, Switchgear, Transformers, Etc.:

1. Engraved nameplates identifying name of equipment, nominal voltage and phase of the equipment and where the equipment is fed from shall be installed on front surface of all panels, motor control centers, switchboards, switchgear, transformers, etc.:



a. Ex: First Line: “NAME: RP-A”, Second Line: “120/208V-3Ø-4W”, Third Line: “FED FROM: PP-A CIR. 4 (IN MAIN ELEC ROOM)”

2. Refer to Panelboard Specification Sections for additional labeling requirements (circuit directory cards, permanent circuit labels, permanent circuit numbers, etc.) required inside panelboards.

C. Safety/Disconnect Switches and Utilization Equipment (HVAC Equipment, Pumps, Powered Valves, Control Panels, Starters, Etc.)::

1. Engraved nameplates identifying equipment being fed and where the equipment is fed from shall be installed on front surface of all disconnect switches (including both visible blade type switches and toggle-type switches) and on utilization equipment (where not clearly identified by immediately adjacent local disconnect switch):

a. Ex: First Line: “RTU-6”, Second Line: “FED FROM: PP-A CIR. 5”

2. Where safety/disconnect switches are installed on the load side of variable frequency drives, the safety/disconnect switch shall be furnished with an additional engraved nameplate to read: “WARNING: TURN OFF VFD PRIOR TO OPENING THIS SWITCH”.

3. Safety/Disconnect switches feeding equipment that is fed from multiple sources (such as motors with integral overtemperature contacts that are monitored via a control system) and Utilization Equipment fed from multiple sources shall be furnished with an additional BLACK-ON-YELLOW engraved nameplate to read: “WARNING: ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT FED FROM MULTIPLE SOURCES – DISCONNECT ALL SOURCES PRIOR TO OPENING COVER”.

D. Emergency Systems:

1. A sign shall be placed at the service entrance equipment indicating the type and location of on-site emergency power sources (such as generators, central battery systems, etc.) per NEC requirements.

2. All boxes and enclosures (including transfer switches, generators, power panels, junction boxes, pullboxes, etc.) dedicated for emergency circuits shall be permanently marked with white-on-red engraved nameplates so they will be readily identified as a component of an emergency circuit or system.

E. Services:

1. All Service Equipment:

a. Engraved nameplates identifying maximum available fault current, including date the fault current calculation was performed, in accordance with NEC article 110.24.

1) Ex: First Line: “AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT: 16,154 AMPS”, Second Line: “DATE CALCULATED: JULY 8, 2013”

b. All service entrance equipment shall be clearly labeled as being service entrance rated.

2. Where a building or structure is supplied by more than one service (or any combination of branch circuits, feeders and services), a permanent plaque or directory shall be installed at each service disconnect location denoting all other services, feeders & branch circuits supplying that building or structure and the area served by each, per NEC requirements.

F. Generators:



1. Generators shall be labeled with engraved nameplates identifying name of equipment.

3.05 EMERGENCY AND STANDBY POWER RECEPTACLE IDENTIFICATION

A. Receptacles fed from emergency or standby power sources (such as emergency generators) shall be provided with factory-marked engraved coverplates as described above.

3.06 OTHER IDENTIFICATION

A. Factory-engraved coverplates identifying functions of light switches and other similar devices shall be installed where so required by plans/specifications.


SECTION 26 24 16

POWER PANELBOARDS - CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE


PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL

A. The work under this section includes but is not limited to the following:

1. Power Panelboards 2. Power Circuit Breakers

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PANELBOARDS - GENERAL

A. Panelboards shall be dead front type, having lugs only or circuit breaker in mains as shown in panelboard schedule with circuit breaker branches.

B. Panelboard bus structure and main lugs or main breaker shall have current ratings as shown on plans. Such rating shall be established by heat rise test with Maximum hot spot temperature on any connector or bus bar not to exceed 50 degrees C rise above ambient at full rated load. Heat rise test shall be conducted in accordance with UL Standard UL67. Bus structure shall be tin-plated aluminum or tin-plated copper. All neutral busses shall be full size. All panelboards shall contain ground buss.

C. Entire panelboard assembly, including all bussing, shall have SCCR ratings meeting or exceeding the minimum AIC ratings listed on the plans for the panel. All ratings shall be full ratings. Series ratings will not be allowed unless shown otherwise on drawings.

D. Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories and shall bear the UL label. Panelboards shall be suitable for use as service equipment when required.

E. Top/bottom feed arrangement and lug sizes/quantities shall be coordinated by the contractor.

2.02 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Where the highest continuous current trip setting for which the actual overcurrent device installed in a circuit breaker is rated (or can be adjusted to is 1200A or higher, breakers shall be electronic trip and shall be provided with arc energy-reducing maintenance switching (with local status indicator) to reduce arc flash energy per NEC 240.87 requirements.

B. Circuit breakers shall be quick-make and quick-break, whether actuated automatically or manually. Circuit breakers shall have inverse time tripping characteristics with automatic release which shall trip free of the handle. Circuit breaker handles shall be three distinct positions—“OFF”, “ON”, and “TRIPPED”. When a circuit breaker opens on overload or short circuit, the operating handle shall automatically assume the “TRIPPED” position.

C. Multipole breakers shall be internal common trip with single operating handle. External handle ties are not acceptable, unless specifically noted otherwise (such as for multi-wire branch circuits described below).

POWER PANELBOARDS - CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE 26 24 16


D. Circuit breakers feeding multiwire branch circuits (as defined by NEC) consisting of separate single phase loads sharing a common neutral shall be provided with handle ties to simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded conductors per NEC Article 210.4(B). The necessary locations of these handle ties shall be coordinated by the contractor. Where necessary, the contractor may rearrange circuit breakers (as minimally as possible) as required to meet this requirement.

E. Circuit breakers shall be of the bolt-on type.

F. Circuit breakers shall be “FA” frame and larger.

G. All breakers shall meet the minimum RMS symmetrical interrupting capacity ratings shown on plans for the associated panel. All interrupting ratings shall be full ratings. Series ratings will not be allowed unless shown otherwise on drawings.

H. The front face of all circuit breakers shall be flush with each other. Breaker numbers shall be permanently attached to trim.

I. All branch circuit breakers shall be listed to UL489 or shall be specially-tested to be HACR listed.

2.03 CABINETS, TRIM AND WIREWAY SPACE

A. Clear space from bottom of lugs to bottom of wireway shall be not less than 6 inches for 400 amps and below, 10 inches for 600 amps, 12 inches for 800 amps and above.

B. Panelboard interiors shall be fastened to cabinets by adjustable aligning supports.

C. Panelboard assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity and gauge of steel to be as specified in UL Standard 50 for cabinets.

D. Fronts of cabinets shall be made from a single sheet of full finished steel having the door cut out. Doors shall have flush hinges, and lock utilizing all metal construction (with all locks keyed alike). Front shall be attached to cabinets with hinged trim with piano-hinge down full length of one side to allow access to wiring without complete removal of outer trim. Front shall be provided with a metal directory and holder with clear plastic covering welded to the inside of the door. Fronts shall be code gauge full-finished steel with rust inhibiting primer and baked enamel finished in ASA #49 gray. Panelboards installed in exterior or wet locations shall have NEMA 3R enclosures.

E. Each section of multi-section panelboards shall be of matching heights and depths.

F. Panelboard enclosures shall be furnished as shown on panel schedule on plans for surface, flush or motor control center mounting.

2.04 MANUFACTURER

A. Panelboards shall be as manufactured by Square 'D', G.E., Siemens or Cutler Hammer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. All panelboard dimensions and clearances shall be carefully checked and coordinated with the proper trades to insure proper mounting space and support prior to roughing in equipment. In no case shall any circuit breaker be located above 6’-7” A.F.F..

POWER PANELBOARDS - CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE 26 24 16


B. Wiring in panelboard gutters shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner. Wiring shall be grouped into neat bundles and secured with approved tie wraps.

3.02 PANEL IDENTIFICATION

A. Refer to Specification Section 26 05 53.


SECTION 26 24 17

LIGHTING PANELBOARDS


PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL

A. The work under this section includes but is not limited to the following:

1. Lighting Panelboards 2. Circuit Breakers 3. Where LOAD CENTERS are indicated on plans, furnish load center panelboard with

maximum depth of 4 inches.

PART 2 PRODUCT

2.01 PANELBOARDS

A. Enclosure:

1. Panelboards shall be dead front type and shall be in accordance with Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc., standard of panelboards and enclosing cabinets and so labeled.

2. Panelboards installed in dry locations shall have enclosures fabricated from sheet steel and shall be finished in ASA #49. Panelboards installed in exterior or wet locations shall have NEMA 3R enclosures.

3. The door shall have a cylinder type lock. Lock shall be held in place by concealed screw to a captive nut, welded to inside of door. All locks shall be keyed alike.

4. A metal framed circuit directory card holder with clear plastic covering shall be factory-mounted on the inside of door.

5. Panels for 20 or more circuits, including spares and spaces, shall be 20 inches wide. 6. Panelboards enclosures shall be as shown on panel schedule on plans for surface, flush or

motor control center mounting. 7. Provide hinged trim with piano-hinge down full length of one side to allow access to wiring

without complete removal of outer trim. 8. Each section of multi-section panelboards shall be of matching heights and depths.

B. Bussing/Lugs:

1. Ampacity and service voltage of main buss, lugs or main breakers and branch circuit breakers shall be as shown on drawings.

2. All bussing and associated connectors shall be tin-plated aluminum or tin-plated copper. 3. All panelboards shall contain ground buss. 4. Entire panelboard shall be capable of withstanding a short circuit not less than the

interrupting capacity of any breaker in the panel. When a power distribution system electrical study (including short circuit stud, etc.) is a part of the project, contractor shall further verify that all proposed equipment is properly rated (per the results of the study) prior to submitting shop drawings. Interrupting ratings shall be full ratings. Series ratings will not be allowed unless shown otherwise on drawings.

5. Buss connectors shall be for distributed phase arrangement. 6. Top/bottom feed arrangement and lug sizes/quantities shall be coordinated by the contractor. 7. Entire panelboard assembly, including all bussing, shall have SCCR ratings meeting or

exceeding the minimum AIC ratings listed on the plans for the panel. When a power

LIGHTING PANELBOARDS 26 24 17


distribution system electrical study (including short circuit stud, etc.) is a part of the project, contractor shall further verify that all proposed equipment is properly rated (per the results of the study) prior to submitting shop drawings. All ratings shall be full ratings. Series ratings will not be allowed unless shown otherwise on drawings.

C. Breaker arrangement and numbering:

1. Panelboards shall be factory assembled with branch breakers arranged exactly as indicated on plans.

2. Breakers shall be numbered vertically beginning top left. Multi-section panelboards shall be numbered consecutively through all sections.

3. Breaker numbers shall be permanently attached to trim. 4. Main breakers shall be vertically-mounted (branch-mounted or back-fed main breakers will

not be acceptable unless specifically so shown on plans).

2.02 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Circuit breakers shall be quick break, quick make, thermal magnetic type, for alternating current. Breakers shall trip free for the handle and tripping shall be indicated by the handle assuming a position between OFF and ON.

B. Circuit breakers shall be of the bolt-on type.

C. Multi-pole breakers shall be internal common trip with single operating handle; external handle ties are not acceptable, unless specifically noted otherwise (such as for multi-wire branch circuits described below).

D. Circuit breakers feeding multiwire branch circuits (as defined by NEC) consisting of separate single phase loads sharing a common neutral shall be provided with multi-pole breakers or handle ties to simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded conductors per NEC Article 210.4(B). The necessary locations of these multi-pole breakers or handle ties shall be coordinated by the contractor. Where necessary, the contractor may rearrange circuit breakers (as minimally as possible) as required to meet this requirement.

E. All breakers shall meet the minimum RMS symmetrical interrupting capacity ratings shown on plans for the associated panel. All interrupting ratings shall be full ratings. Series ratings will not be allowed unless shown otherwise on drawings.

F. All branch circuit breakers shall be listed to UL489 or shall be specially-tested to be HACR listed.

2.03 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Any special requirements on the drawings, such as for increased interrupting rating, ground fault protection, etc., shall supersede these specifications, but only insofar as that particular requirement is concerned.

B. Lighting panels larger than 400A shall conform to the requirements for power panels.

2.04 MANUFACTURER

A. Panelboards shall be as manufactured by Square 'D', G.E., Siemens or Cutler Hammer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

LIGHTING PANELBOARDS 26 24 17


A. All panelboard dimensions and clearances shall be carefully checked and coordinated with the proper trades to insure proper mounting space and support prior to roughing in equipment. In no case shall any circuit breaker be located above 6’-7” A.F.F..

B. Wiring in panelboard wireways shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner. Wiring shall be grouped into neat bundles and secured with approved tie wraps.

C. For all flush-mounted panelboards, a minimum of three (3) one-inch empty conduits shall be stubbed out above the nearest accessible ceiling space for future use.

3.02 PANEL IDENTIFICATION

A. Refer to Specification Section 26 05 53.


SECTION 26 24 18

METER CENTERS


PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. This section includes requirements for multi-metering centers (METER-PAKS).

B. Meter Center shall be UL listed.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Specification Section 26 05 00.

B. Submittals shall show separate views of the elevation, profile and conduit openings. The elevation shall show the section identification and the unit identification. The drawings shall give dimensions of size and location of the following:

1. Vertical section height, width and depth 2. Mounting channels 3. Conduit openings top and bottom 4. Wireway openings in sides 5. Horizontal buss 6. Ground buss

Buss bracing and short circuit rating Submittals shall be complete and electrical contractor shall review and approve all accessories required for control wiring prior to submittal

PART 2 PRODUCT

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Square 'D', G.E., Siemens or Cutler Hammer.

B. Manufacturer must be on approved list from local utility company.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Steel material shall comply with UL 845 and CSA requirements.

B. Each meter center shall be rated NEMA 3R.

C. Each entire meter center assembly (including all sub-components) shall be rated to withstand (and provide proper breaker functionality within) the fault current ratings listed on the plans. The fault current ratings listed shall be assumed to be at the input terminals of the associated meter center.

D. Metering sockets shall be as directed by the utility company. Contractor shall confirm with the utility company the type of metering sockets required prior to submittal.

E. All meter sockets shall be rated as shown on the plans and rated for continuous duty.

METER CENTERS 26 24 18


F. Furnish number of metering sections as required to accomplish the configuration shown on plans.

2.03 BUSSING

A. All bussing and connectors shall be tin-plated copper.

B. The main horizontal bus shall be rated as indicated on plans and shall extend the full length of the meter center.

C. The meter center shall be setup for a 120/208V-3P-4W incoming service. Individual meters shall be 120/208V-1P-3W. Arrangements shall be such that single phase loads are balanced as equally as possible on the incoming three phase service.

2.04 BRANCH CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Branch circuit breakers shall be installed as indicated on plans. Breakers sizes shall be available up to 225 amps.


SECTION 26 27 26

WIRING DEVICES


PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Wiring Devices

B. Plates

C. Finishes

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES

A. Switches shall be AC type, specification grade (unless otherwise shown) of ratings shown on drawings. Switches shall be as manufactured by Hubbell, P & S, Sierra, Bryant, GE, Arrow Hart or equal.

B. Receptacles shall have blade configuration and shall be specification grade (unless otherwise shown) of current and voltage rating as shown on drawings. Receptacles shall be as manufactured by Hubbell, P & S, Sierra, Bryant, GE, Arrow Hart or equal.

C. Each wiring device shall have a plate (see “Finishes” section below for specific requirements).

D. All devices in residential units shall be tamper resistant.

2.02 FINISHES

A. All wiring devices (switches, receptacles, etc.) shall be colored to match the coverplates described below. For instance, all items covered by stainless steel, aluminum or malleable iron plates shall be gray in color.

1. Exceptions:

a. Emergency wiring devices shall be red. b. Isolated ground wiring devices shall be orange.

B. Coverplates for recessed, wall-mounted electrical items (switches, receptacles, telephone outlets, etc.) shall be plastic unless shown otherwise.

C. Coverplates, trim rings, etc. for recessed, floor-mounted electrical items (floor outlets, underfloor duct junctions, etc.) shall match finish of building hardware (302/304 stainless steel, brass, etc.) in area installed.

D. Coverplates for exposed electrical items (switches, receptacles, telephone outlets, etc.) shall be of same material as exposed boxes (see Outlet Box Specification for required material type) and shall have beveled edges.

E. Coverplates for receptacles in wet locations shall be metallic, in-use type, rated for wet locations

WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26


A. per NEC requirements unless noted otherwise.

B. See “Electrical Identification” specification section for coverplate labeling requirements.

PART 1 EXECUTION

1.01 GENERAL MOUNTING

A. Symbols on drawings and mounting heights are approximate. The exact locations and mounting heights shall be determined on the job, and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to coordinate with all trades to secure correct installation. For example, Contractor shall coordinate exact mounting heights over counters, in or above backsplashes, in block walls, and at other specific construction features.

B. Verify all door swings with Architectural. Locate boxes for light switches within four inches of door trim on swing side (not hinge side) of door.

C. Devices and associates plates shall not be used as support; outlet boxes shall be rigidly supported from structural members.

D. Mount all receptacles vertical with ground pole down.

E. Unless otherwise shown or required by local handicap codes, centerline of outlet boxes shall be the following distances above the finished floor unless otherwise noted.

1. Receptacles and telephone outlets in offices and other finished areas: 1’-6” 2. Receptacles and telephone outlets in equipment rooms and other unfinished areas: 4’-0” 3. Receptacles over counters: As Noted 4. Clock outlet, general: 7’-6” 5. Switches, general: 4’-0” 6. Bell outlets, interior, general: 7’-6” 7. Bell outlets, exterior, general: 10’-0” or 1’-0” below roof line, whichever is lower. 8. Fire Alarm Pull Stations: 4’-0” 9. Fire Alarm Audio/Visual Devices: 6’-8” 10. Push-button, etc., general: 4’-0”


SECTION 26 28 16

SAFETY SWITCHES AND FUSES


PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Safety Switches

B. Fuses

C. Branch Feeders

D. Feeders

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SAFETY SWITCHES

A. Safety switches shall be quick-make, quick-break, NEMA heavy duty type HD, fused or nonfused as shown. Switch blades shall be fully visible in the off position.

B. Safety switches shall be furnished with transparent internal barrier kits to prevent accidental contact with live parts. Barriers shall provide finger-safe protection when the switch door is open and shall allow use of test probes and removal of fuses without removing barrier.

C. Fused switches shall have provisions for class R, rejection type fuses.

2.02 FUSES (600V)

A. Fuses for all branch switches shall be Bussman Mfg. Co., Dual Element, Class “R” Fusetron.

B. Fuses for main switch/switches shall be Bussman Mfg. Co. Hi-Cap.

2.03 MANUFACTURER

A. Safety switches shall be as manufactured by Square 'D', G.E., Siemens or Cutler Hammer.

B. Fuses shall be as manufactured by Bussman Mfg. Co. or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SAFETY SWITCHES

A. Safety switches shall be installed as shown on the plans and in accordance with N.E.C.

B. Locations shown for safety switches on plans are diagrammatical only. Exact locations shall be field coordinated by contractor as required to provide code-required clearances.

C. Switch enclosures shall be rated NEMA I indoors in dry locations and NEMA3R outdoors and in wet areas.

SAFETY SWITCHES AND FUSES 26 28 16


D. Adequate support shall be provided for mounting safety switches. Safety switches shall not be mounted to the associated equipment (unless the safety switch is furnished with the equipment).

3.02 FUSES

A. Fuses shall be sized as shown on drawings, unless a smaller size is required by the associated equipment supplier, in which case the contractor shall provide fuses sized as directed by the associated equipment supplier at no additional cost.

B. Provide not less than one spare set of fuses for each size used. Provide an additional spare set for each five sets of same size fuses used.


SECTION 26 43 00

SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES


PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes field-mounted SPDs for low-voltage (<1000 V) power distribution and control equipment.

B. The specified unit(s) shall provide effective high energy transient voltage surge suppression, surge current diversion and high frequency noise attenuation in all electrical modes for equipment connected downstream from the facility’s meter or load side of the main overcurrent device. The unit(s) shall be connected in parallel with the facility’s wiring system.

C. The unit(s) shall be designed and manufactured in North America by a qualified manufacturer of suppression filter system equipment. The qualified manufacturer shall have been engaged in the commercial design and manufacturer of such products for minimum of ten (10) years.

D. All products that are submitted according to these specification will be required to meet this specification in it’s entirety for both service and distribution TVSS systems. Any product that is submitted and does not comply with all parts of this specification will be subject to rejection.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. VPR: Voltage Protection Rating.

B. SPD: Surge Protective Device(s)

C. I(n): Nominal Discharge Current

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See specification section 26 05 00.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include:

1. Maximum Single Impulse Surge Current Rating. 2. Surge Life (Repetitive Surge) Rating. 3. UL1449 (Latest Edition) Voltage Protection Ratings (VPR). 4. UL1449 (Latest Edition) Nominal Discharge Current (In). 5. Product dimensions and weights. 6. Furnished specialties and accessories.

C. Qualification Data:

D. Safety Agency File Number.

SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 43 00


E. ISO 9001-2008 Certification.

F. ISO 1401-2001 Certification.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For SPDs to include all submittal data and any applicable operation and maintenance manuals.

H. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. The unit shall be UL 1449 Listed and CUL Approved as a Surge Protective Device and UL 1283 Listed as an Electromagnetic Interference Filter

C. Provide 2nd party certified data demonstrating SPD response to ANSI/IEEE C62.41.2-2002 standard waveforms when tested according to IEEE C62.45.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. All SPDs provided within this project at the service entrance, distribution panels, and sub-panels shall be from the same manufacturer.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Service Conditions: Rate SPDs for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: Not less than 115 percent of nominal system operating voltage.

2. Operating Temperature: 30 to 150 deg F. 3. Humidity: 0 to 95 percent, non-condensing. 4. Altitude: Less than 13,000 feet above sea level.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Where field-mounted SPD’s are specifically shown on plans, coordinate locations of field-mounted SPDs to allow adequate clearances for maintenance.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of surge suppressors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.



1. Replaceable Protection Modules: 1 of each size and type installed, where field-replaceable modular SPDs are provided.

2. Fuses: 1 of each size and type installed, where field-replaceable fuses are provided.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Manufacturer:

1. Integral Devices: Surge Protective Devices shall be as manufactured by the distribution equipment manufacturer (Square D, etc.), or by Surge Suppression Inc. if all of the performance of this specification are met and all UL listing of the equipment manufacturer are met.

2. External Devices (where specifically specified on plans): Surge Protective Devices shall be as manufactured by the distribution equipment manufacturer (Square D, etc.) or Surge Suppression Inc.

B. Each Surge Protective Device shall:

1. Be internal to the associated distribution equipment (without violating any applicable UL listings) unless specifically shown otherwise on plans.

2. Be UL 1449 (Latest Edition) listed. 3. Have short-circuit current rating complying with UL 1449 (Latest Edition), that matches or

exceeds the short-circuit rating of the associated distribution equipment. 4. Be designed to withstand a maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV) of not less than

115% of nominal RMS voltage. 5. Have fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. 6. Have a minimum UL 1449 Nominal Discharge Current (In) Rating of 20kA. 7. Be fabricated using bolted compression lugs. 8. Provide suppression for all ten (10) modes of protection. 9. Have LED indicator lights for power and protection status of each phase. 10. Have audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. 11. Have form-C contacts rated at 2 A and 24-V ac minimum, one normally open and one

normally closed, for remote monitoring of protection status. Contacts shall reverse on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device. Coordinate with facility monitoring and control system if monitoring by that system is required by plans or other specifications.

12. Have six-digit transient-event counter, mounted to front of equipment door, set to totalize transient surges (externally mounted SPD’s may have the transient –event counter monted on the visible face of the SPD).

13. Meet all UL 96A requirements (for Lightning Protection Systems) where the device is installed at a service entrance of the facility. At a minimum, these devices shall:

a. Be marked as Type 1 or Type 2 SPDs with product Identity consisting of “Surge Protective Device” or “SPD”, and identifying all ratings so required by UL96A and the 4 digit alpha numeric Control Number.

b. Have a minimum UL 1449 Nominal Discharge Current (In) Rating of 20kA. c. Be UL listed and labeled with holographic label.

C. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating shall be meet the following minimums unless specifically shown otherwise on plans:

Application Per Phase Per Mode



Service Entrance Devices

240 kA

120 kA

Downstream Devices 160 kA 80 kA

D. The ANSI/UL 1449 voltage protection rating (VPR) in grounded wye circuits, the SPDs shall not exceed the following:

Modes 208Y/120V 480Y/277V 600Y/347V

L-N,L-G, N-G 800 1200 1500

L-L 1200 2000 2500

E. The ANSI /UL 1449 VPR for 240/120 V, 3-wire or 4-wire circuits with high leg shall not exceed the following:

Modes 240/120V

L-N,L-G, N-G 1200/800

2.02 ENCLOSURES

A. Where external units are specifically specified on plans, units not mounted within electrical distribution equipment (such as switchboards, MCC’s, etc.) shall be provided in enclosures with NEMA enclosure ratings that match or exceed the NEMA enclosure ratings of the equipment from which the units are fed. For example, a unit fed from a NEMA 4X stainless steel panelboard shall also be mounted within a NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosure.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. All SPD’s shall be integrally-mounted within the associated distribution equipment unless specifically shown otherwise on plans.

B. Install SPDs at service entrance on load side, with ground lead bonded to service entrance ground.

C. Install SPDs downstream of the service entrance with conductors or buses between suppressor and points of attachment as short and straight as possible. The lead lengths between the TVSS unit and the equipment being protected shall not exceed fourteen (14) inches without approval from the engineer. Do not bond neutral and ground. Leads shall be as straight as possible with no sharp bends.

D. Where externally-mounted SPD’s are specifically shown on plans, provide circuit breaker as directed by the SPD supplier as a dedicated disconnecting means for SPD unless otherwise indicated.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Ensure that interiors are free of foreign materials and dirt.



B. Check and test switches, pushbuttons, meters for proper operation.

C. Check and test indicating lights for proper operation and color.

D. Perform manufacturer's on site field test procedures.

3.03 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Do not perform insulation resistance (MEGGER) tests of the distribution wiring equipment with the SPDs installed. Disconnect all wires, including neutral, before conducting insulation resistance tests, and reconnect immediately after the testing is over.

3.04 SYSTEM WARRANTY

A. The SPD system manufacturer shall warranty the entire SPD system against defective materials and workmanship for a period of ten (10) years from the date of substantial completion. This warranty is in effect as long as the unit is installed in compliance with the manufacturer's installation, operation, and maintenance manual, UL Listing requirements, and any applicable national or local electrical codes.

B. Any SPD device which shows evidence of failure or incorrect operation, including damage as the result of lightning strikes, during the warranty period shall be replaced by the manufacturer at no charge to the owner. Warranty will provide for multiple exchanges of any inoperable devices at any time during the warranty period which starts at the date of substantial completion of the system to which the surge suppressor is installed.

C. The manufacturer is required to have a nationwide network of factory-authorized local service representatives for repair and service of this product. The manufacturer shall have a dedicated 1-800 telephone number for service problems and questions. This number shall be manned by a knowledgeable factory employee to ensure prompt response to any emergency situation that may arise.


SECTION 26 50 00

LIGHTING MATERIALS AND METHODS


PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Lighting

B. Ballasts/Drivers

C. Lamps

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Complete submittals shall be provided identifying all lighting fixture types and options, all lamp types (where applicable) and compliance with all contract requirements. The absence of clear submittal information specifically listing exceptions/deviations from detailed contract requirements will be understood to indicated that the contractor/supplier intends to meet all contract requirements. Refer to specification section 26 05 00 for additional requirements.

B.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Lighting fixtures shall be furnished as shown on plans and specified herein. It shall specifically be the responsibility of Contractor to verify exact types ceilings, walls, etc. and recessing depth of all recessed fixtures and furnish the specific mounting trims and accessories of the specified and/or accepted fixture specifically for the ceiling, wall etc. in which each fixture is to be installed.

B. Base bid manufacturers are listed on the lighting fixture schedule. Manufacturers listed without accompanying catalog numbers are responsible for meeting the quality standards, efficiency, maximum wattages and photometric distributions set by the specified product.

C. All lighting fixtures shall be so designed and shall have ballasts, drivers and other similar items so installed as to function without interruptions or failures when operating in the environment in which they are proposed to be installed. Special attention shall be given to environments with potentially high ambient temperatures such as attic spaces, exterior soffits, confined interior soffits, coves, unconditioned spaces, etc. and shall be addressed by providing fixtures with suitable high ambient temperature ratings, remote mounting of drivers/ballasts, providing approved ventilation, etc. as directed by fixture manufacturer and approved by engineer, at contractor’s expense.

D. All fixtures installed such as to create penetrations through fire rated ceiling or wall assemblies shall be labeled as suitable for that purpose or installed with covers, tenting or other means as required to maintain the fire rating of the assembly.

2.02 LED LUMINAIRES

A. For the purpose of these specifications, LED Luminaires shall be defined as the entire LED

LIGHTING MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 50 00


fixture assembly including LED array, drivers, housing, electronics, etc. that compose the lighting fixture.

B. Furnish and install LED Luminaire of proper size, type, efficacy, delivered lumen output, color temperature, distribution pattern, operational life, and CRI as shown on drawings.

C. LED Luminaires shall be tested in accordance with LM-79 and LM-80 standards.

D. LED drivers shall comply with NEMA 410 standards for inrush current, etc.

E. Exterior, pole mounted LED Luminaires shall be provided with an easily-serviceable, UL recognized surge protection device that meets a minimum 10kA Category C Low operation (IECC C62.41.2-2002). Device shall be wired in front of light engine(s) and driver(s) and shall fail “open” such as to prevent fixture operation after a surge protection failure.

F. LED Luminaires shall have a guarantee-warranty of at least five years unless specifically noted otherwise on contract documents.

G. LED Luminaire assembly shall comply with ambient temperature requirements specified in General section above.

2.03 BALLASTS

A. Unless shown otherwise on plans, all fluorescent ballasts shall be electronic type with 10% maximum harmonic distortion and shall be approved by E.T.L. and have U.L. and C.B.M. label, be high power factor and have a noise level rating in accordance with I.E.S. recommendations. Fluorescent ballasts shall conform to temperature requirement noted under fixture above.

B. All T8 and T5HO ballasts shall be programmed-start type with parallel wiring (Philips/Advance Optanium #PSP or equal by GE).

C. All HID ballasts shall be of the pulse-start super constant wattage autotransformer type (SCWA) or electronic type. Reactor-type HID ballasts are unacceptable.

D. Each ballast shall be properly protected by fusing, internal or external to the ballast assembly. Where required by the authority having jurisdiction, provide HLR/GMF fusing of proper size and rating external to each individual ballast. All fuses for fixtures mounted on steel or aluminum poles shall be mounted in handhole near fixture base. Contractor shall verify requirement with authority having jurisdiction prior to submitting shop drawings.

E. Ballasts shall comply with NEMA 410 standards for inrush current, etc.

F. See General paragraph above for ballast temperature requirements.

2.04 STEMS/PENDANTS

A. Hangers shall be approved ball aligner type swivel, 30 degrees from vertical with swivel below canopy.

B. Stems/Pendants shall be rigid or IMC conduit unless specified otherwise on plans. Proposed stem/pendant types shall be submitted for review prior to shipment of light fixtures from factory.

C. Stems/Pendants shall be provided as required to prevent swaying of fixtures due to HVAC system airflow or other similar occurrences.



D. Shall be painted the same color as the fixture trim unless noted otherwise.

2.05 LAMPS

A. Furnish and install lamps of proper size and type as shown on drawings.

B. All lamps shall be installed new, immediately prior to final inspection and shall not be used for construction purposes.

C. The guarantee-warranty shall apply to lamps as follows:

1. Screw-in LED Lamps shall be guaranteed for one (1) full year (see LED Luminaires section above for LED luminaire warranty requirements).

2. Fluorescent and HID Lamps shall be guaranteed for one (1) full year. 3. Incandescent lamps shall be guaranteed for one (1) month. 4. All Quartz Lamps shall be guaranteed for six (6) months. 5. Guarantee shall begin from date of final acceptance.

2.06 MANUFACTURER

A. Fixtures and stems shall be manufactured as shown in fixture schedule or approved equals.

B. Ballasts/drivers shall be as manufactured by Philips/Advance, GE, Lutron, Magnatec, Motorola, EldoLED or approved equal.

C. Lamps shall be as manufactured by General Electric, Sylvania, Philips or approved equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. Support:

1. Support of all lighting fixtures shall be responsibility of electrical contractor. All lighting fixture supports shall be installed in accordance with lighting fixture supplier’s recommendations.

2. Contractor shall coordinate installation requirements for all wall-mounted fixtures (especially for wall-mounted fixtures on uneven wall surfaces, etc.) as required to assure a level/flat mounting surface and level/plumb/secure finished installation. Contractor shall provide flat mounting plates or other mounting provisions where necessary. Any proposed mounting plates, etc. shall be submitted to and approved by project architect prior to ordering materials.

3. Fixtures shall be supported independent of ceiling from structural members of building. 4. Lay-in fixtures shall be supported by four (4) taut 12 gauge hanger wires connected from

each corner of the fixture to the structure above so that fixture is supported independent of the ceiling.

5. Other recessed light fixtures (including recessed downlights) shall be supported with two (2) taut 12 gauge hanger wires connected from opposing corners of the light fixture to the structure above so that fixture is supported independent of the ceiling.

6. Pendant mounted fixtures shall be directly supported from the structure above using a 9 gauge hanger wire or an approved alternate support without using the ceiling suspension system for direct support.

7. Tandem fixtures may utilize common hanger wires. 8. All lay-in fixtures shall be attached to ceiling grid by means of approved clips and in

accordance with the N.E.C. 9. Contractor shall submit typical hanging detail to Engineer before installing any fixtures.



B. Connections:

1. All grid fixtures shall be wired by flex individually to junction and not wired fixture to fixture. 2. All flex shall contain 3 conductors (3rd wire ground). Ground wire shall be securely grounded

at each end. Other conductors shall be connected by approved connectors.

C. Row-Mounted fixtures:

1. All stems on row-mounted fluorescent fixtures shall be installed as follows (except fixtures with slide grip hangers):

a. One stem shall be installed in the first fixture knockout from end of row (on the first and last fixture of the row).

b. One stem shall be installed between each two fixtures. Stem shall center joint where fixtures join and shall attach by use of “joining plates”.

2. All fixtures in continuous rows other than recessed grid type shall be connected by nipples with locknuts bushings.

D. Coordination:

1. Contractor shall coordinate all dimensions & locations of light fixtures prior to rough-in to insure proper fit and coordination with other trades.

2. Contractor shall verify exact ceiling types being installed and shall adjust fixture trim types accordingly (prior to submitting light fixture shop drawings).

3.02 SPARE LAMPS

A. Turn over to Owner a minimum of one of each type lamp used. In addition, turn over to Owner one spare lamp for each ten (10) or major factors thereof used, up to a maximum of 20 for any one type and size.


SECTION 28 31 00

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM


PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install a complete low voltage, automatic sprinkler monitoring system as specified herein and indicated on the drawings.

B. The system shall include a central control panel, power supply, signal initiating devices, a conduit and wiring system and all necessary accessories required to provide a complete operating system.

C. The system shall be completely addressable.

D. The system shall comply with the applicable provisions of the National Fire Protection Association Standard Number 72 (National Fire Alarm Code) for fire alarm systems; N.E.C. Article 760; and meet all requirements of the local authorities having jurisdiction.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM

A. Conduit, outlet boxes, cabinets, devices and wiring installation for complete fire detection and alarm system.

B. Each and every item of the Sprinkler Monitoring System shall be listed as a product of a SINGLE fire alarm system manufacturer under the appropriate category by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and shall bear the "UL" label. All control equipment shall be listed under UL category UOBZ as a single control unit. Partial listing shall not be acceptable. System controls shall be UL listed for Power Limited Applications per N.E.C. Article 760. All circuits shall be marked in accordance with N.E.C. 760-23.

C. Wiring shown is diagrammatic to define system and is not intended to show every wire. Review drawings prior to bidding and inform Contractor of any additional wiring necessary for installation of systems. Include cost of all wiring in bid.

D. Manufacturer's trained technical representative shall supervise installation, connections and tests. The authority having jurisdiction shall be notified prior to installation or alteration of equipment or wiring. Before acceptance, manufacturer's representative will test and certify in writing that system is installed and functioning properly as intended by drawings and specifications. Test includes operation of all devices in entire system.

E. Guarantee entire system in writing for one year from date of acceptance by Owner. Guarantee will cover completely all components, equipment, wiring, etc. Repair any defects found in the system within the guarantee period without cost to owner.

F. Submit with bid a guaranteed price for complete maintenance and service of system for one year beginning at expiration of guarantee period. Price shall be guaranteed for acceptance by Owner until date of substantial completion of system.

1.03 SYSTEM OPERATION

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 00


A. Operation of any sprinkler monitoring switch, power failure, opens, grounds, or any disarrangement of the system wiring or components shall be indicated by a visual and audible trouble signal. The audible trouble signal may be silenced; however, the trouble LED shall remain lit until the system has been returned to normal operating condition.

B. Analog Smoke Sensor Operation

1. The smoke sensor shall be a smoke density measuring device having no self contained alarm set-point. The alarm decision for each sensor shall be determined by the control panel. The control panel shall determine the condition of each sensor by comparing the sensor value to stored values.

2. The control panel shall maintain a moving average of the sensors smoke chamber value. Systems that do not automatically maintain a constant smoke obscuration sensitivity for each sensor by compensating for environmental factors and are deemed unacceptable.

3. The system shall automatically indicate when an individual sensor needs cleaning. When a sensor’s average value reaches a predetermined value, a “Dirty Sensor” trouble condition shall be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel for the individual sensor. Additionally, the LED on the sensor base shall glow steady giving a visible indication at the sensor location.

4. If a “Dirty Sensor” is left unattended, and its average value increases to a second predetermined value, an “Excessively Dirty Sensor” trouble condition shall be indicated at the control panel for the individual sensor.

5. The control panel shall automatically perform a daily self-test on each sensor. Checking the electronics in the sensor’s base ensures the accuracy of the values being transmitted to the control panel. A sensor which fails the self-test will cause a “Self Test Abnormal” trouble condition at the control panel. A sensor self-test which must be manually initiated by the operator shall not be acceptable.

1.04 SYSTEM FEATURES

A. The sprinkler monitoring system shall include the following features as a minimum:

1. Supervision of all field wiring. 2. Microprocessor based solid state modular construction. 3. Ground fault detection and ground fault isolating & supervising circuitry. 4. 80 character LCD display to indicate alarms, supervisory service conditions and troubles. 5. Simultaneous test of all LED's and LCD’s from a central point. 6. "Dead Front" design control panel/annunciator with field programmable LED alarm, status

and trouble indicators, and all control switches located behind a locked tempered glass door. 7. Fully automatic battery charger and lead alkaline batteries. Batteries shall have capacity to

maintain system operation for 60 hours in normal supervisory mode and shall have sufficient capacity remaining to operate in alarm mode for 15 minutes at conclusion of supervisory period. Batteries shall be supervised for connection to the system and for low voltage threshold. Ammeter and voltmeter shall be provided to indicate battery voltage and charging current.

8. Two (2) sets of 2 amp form C auxiliary alarm contacts fused with feedback. 9. One (1) set of 2 amp form C auxiliary trouble contacts. 10. Standard with 99 addressable points (expandable to 250 points) and four input/output (I/0)

circuits (expandable to 20 circuits). 11. Basic four (4) amp power supply (expandable as required). 12. 600 event historical logging. 13. System shall be field programmable for offsite monitoring by remote station reverse polarity,

local energy master box or shunt master box types. 14. System shall be field programmable for signal circuit type of operation; march time code,

temporal code, selective code, zone code, general alarm, time limit cutout and alarm silence inhibit.



15. System shall be field programmable for waterflow/sprinkler supervisory operation on distinct zones as required.

16. Transient suppression protection shall be provided on the system power supply and on the municipal protection circuit to comply with UL 864 requirements. Additionally, surge suppression shall be provided within the control panel on all circuits that extend outside the building (including to roof-mounted HVAC units).

17. Supervised remote annunciator connection circuit. 18. System shall incorporate an alarm/trouble walk test. 19. Resident non-volatile programmable operating system memory for all operating

requirements.

PART 2

PART 3 PRODUCTS

3.01 SPRINKLER MONITORING CONTROL PANEL

A. Furnish and install Simplex type 4010-9101 fire alarm control panel(s) with options and accessories as required.

3.02 PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE SENSOR

A. The smoke sensors shall be of the photoelectric addressable Simplex type 4098-9714 and shall communicate actual smoke chamber values to the system control panel. The smoke sensors shall operate on the light scatter principle. For maximum maintenance free service and low power requirement, light source for detection chamber and visual alarm indication shall be solid state photodiode.

B. Each sensor base shall be visually and electrically supervised.

C. The sensors shall be listed to UL Standard 268 and shall be documented compatible with the control equipment to which they are connected. The sensors shall be listed for both ceiling and wall mount applications.

D. Each sensor base shall contain integral addressable electronics and an LED that will flash each time it is scanned by the control panel (once every 4 seconds). The control panel shall be responsible for drift compensation. When the control panel determines that a sensor is in an alarm or a trouble condition, the control panel shall command the LED on that sensor’s base to turn on steady indicating the abnormal condition. Sensors which do not provide a visible indication of an abnormal condition at the sensor location shall not be acceptable. Sensor bases shall be compatible with detachable photoelectric, ionization and heat sensors so that these various sensor types can be easily interchanged to meet specific location requirements. Sensor base shall be addressable type as required.

E. Where required, sensor bases shall be provided with a relay driver output and supervised relay, which are to be controlled either automatically or manually from the control panel.

F. Each sensor base shall be scanned by the control panel for its type identification to prevent inadvertent substitution of the wrong sensor type. The control panel shall operate with the installed device but shall initiate a “Wrong Device” trouble condition until the proper type is installed or the programmed sensor type is changed.

G. Each sensor shall contain a magnetically actuated test switch to provide for easy alarm testing at the sensor location.



H. The sensor’s electronics shall be immune from false alarms caused by EMI and RFI.

I. Cover all smoke detection devices with plastic bags immediately after installation to maintain cleanliness, if field conditions so require.

J. Provide a U.L. listed sensor guard for sensors in areas subject to tampering. The guard shall be suitable for ceiling or sidewall mounting and hinged for easy access. The guard shall be securely mounted with tamper-proof screws.

3.03 SPRINKLER FLOW SWITCHES

A. Sprinkler flow switches and supervisory switches are provided under another section of these specifications. This contractor shall be responsible for electrical connection of these devices to the fire alarm system.

3.04 OFF SITE MONITORING

A. Furnish all material and labor to accomplish and coordinate with local company or fire department as necessary for off site monitoring of the Fire Alarm System. Off site monitoring shall be in operation prior to final acceptance.

B. Furnish and install digital alarm communicating transmitter (DACT) integral to or beside fire alarm control panel.

3.05 MANUFACTURER

A. All equipment shall be listed by UL. All panels and peripheral devices shall be the standard equipment of a single manufacturer and shall display the manufacturer's name on each component. Manufacturer's numbers specified in this section are those of Simplex Time Recorder Company to denote type, quality, material and desired operating features to be furnished.

B. Equipment shall be as manufactured by Simplex, Notifier or EST.

PART 4 EXECUTION

4.01 INSTALLATION

A. Provide and install the system in accordance with the plans and specifications, all applicable codes and the manufacturer's recommendations. All wiring shall be installed in strict compliance with all the provisions of NEC - Article 760 A and C, Power-Limited Fire Protective Signaling Circuits or if required may be reclassified as non-power limited and wired in accordance with NEC-Article 760 A and B. Upon completion, the contractor shall so certify in writing to the owner and general contractor. All junction boxes shall be sprayed red and labeled "Fire Alarm". Wiring color code shall be maintained throughout the installation.

B. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the contract shall be closely coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors.

C. All raceways shall be concealed unless specifically shown or approved otherwise.

D. The contractor shall provide 120VAC power to all remote booster power supplies or other similar items required. Where the project is provided with emergency power from an emergency generator, all power supplies shall be connected to an emergency source.



E. The contractor shall clean all dirt and debris from the inside and the outside of the fire alarm equipment after completion of the installation.

F. The manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide on site supervision of installation.

G. The manufacturer’s authorized representative shall have as a minimum, a NICET LEVEL II certification.

H. Per NFPA 72, A dedicated branch circuit (or circuits) shall be provided to supply primary power to the fire alarm system. The associated branch circuit breaker shall be furnished with lock-on hardware and shall be identified with red marking as a fire alarm circuit. The location of the circuit disconnecting means shall be permanently identified at the fire alarm control unit.

4.02 TESTING

A. The completed fire alarm system shall be fully tested in accordance with NFPA-72H by the contractor in the presence of the owner's representative and the Local Fire Marshal. Upon completion of a successful test, the contractor shall so certify in writing to the owner and general contractor.

4.03 WARRANTY

A. The contractor shall warrant the completed fire alarm system wiring and equipment to be free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects for a period of one (1) year from the date of the completed and certified test or from the date of first beneficial use.

B. The equipment manufacturer shall make available to the owner a maintenance contract proposal to provide a minimum of two (2) inspections and tests per year in compliance with NFPA-72H guidelines.

4.04 CERTIFICATION & ACCEPTANCE

A. A factory trained representative of the manufacturer shall supervise final testing of the system in accordance with N.F.P.A. Standard 72H-1984 in the presence of a representative of the authority having jurisdiction. Manufacturer’s representative shall be NICET trained and shall have a level II NICET certificate. It shall be subject to the approval and acceptance of the responsible engineer. On completion of the acceptance tests, the Owner or his representative shall be instructed in the operation and testing of the system.

B. The fire alarm system shall be free from defects in workmanship and materials, under normal use and service, for a period of one year from the date of acceptance or beneficial occupancy whichever is earlier. Any equipment shown to be defective in workmanship or material shall be repaired, replaced, or adjusted free of charge.

C. The equipment manufacturer shall be represented by a service organization, and the name of this organization shall be furnished to the Architect and Owner. The service organization shall be located within 50 miles of the job site. The service organization shall furnish, gratis to the Owner, a one year maintenance warranty contract, effective from the date of final acceptance.


15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 27 1005 - 1 STRUCTURED CABLING FORVOICE AND DATA -

INSIDE-PLANT

SECTION 27 1005STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND DATA - INSIDE-PLANT


A. Communications system design requirements.B. Copper cable and terminations.C. Communications identification.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction,

Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.B. TIA-606-B - Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure; Rev B, 2012.C. TIA-607-B - Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises;

Rev B, 2012 (with Addenda; 2013).D. UL 1863 - Communications-Circuit Accessories; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SYSTEM DESIGN

A. Provide a complete permanent system of cabling and pathways for voice and data communications,including cables, conduits and wireways, pull wires, support structures, enclosures and cabinets, andoutlets.1. Provide fixed cables and pathways that comply with NFPA 70 and TIA-607 and are UL listed or

third party independent testing laboratory certified.2. Provide connection devices that are rated for operation under conditions of 32 to 140 degrees F at

relative humidity of 0 to 95 percent, noncondensing.3. In this project, the term plenum is defined as return air spaces above ceilings, inside ducts, under

raised floors, and other air-handling spaces.B. Main Distribution Frame (MDF): Centrally located support structure for terminating horizontal cables

that extend to telecommunications outlets, functioning as point of presence to external service provider.1. Locate main distribution frame as indicated on the drawings.

C. Intermediate Distribution Frames (IDF): Support structures for terminating horizontal cables that extendto telecommunications outlets.1. Locate intermediate distribution frames as indicated on the drawings.

D. Cabling to Outlets: Specified horizontal cabling, wired in star topology to distribution frame located atcenter hub of star; also referred to as "links".

2.02 COPPER CABLE AND TERMINATIONSA. Copper Cable Terminations: Insulation displacement connection (IDC) type using appropriate tool; use

screw connections only where specifically indicated.B. Jacks and Connectors: Modular RJ-45, non-keyed, terminated with 110-style insulation displacement

connectors (IDC); high impact thermoplastic housing; suitable for and complying with same standard asspecified horizontal cable; UL 1863 listed.1. Performance: 500 mating cycles.2. Voice and Data Jacks: 8-position modular jack, color-coded for both T568A and T568B wiring

configurations.2.03 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Comply with TIA-606.2.04 ENCLOSURES

A. Outlet Boxes: For flush mounting in walls; depth as required to accommodate cable manufacturer'srecommended minimum conductor bend radius.

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 27 1005 - 2 STRUCTURED CABLING FORVOICE AND DATA -

INSIDE-PLANT

1. Faceplates: High impact thermoplastic, complying with system design standards and UL 514C.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Comply with Communication Service Provider requirements.B. Grounding and Bonding: Perform in accordance with TIA-607 and NFPA 70.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND CABLINGA. Cabling:

1. Do not bend cable at radius less than manufacturer's recommended bend radius; for unshieldedtwisted pair use bend radius of not less than 4 times cable diameter.

2. Do not over-cinch or crush cables.3. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended cable pull tension.4. When installing in conduit, use only lubricants approved by cable manufacturer and do not chafe or

damage outer jacket.B. Service Loops (Slack or Excess Length): Provide the following minimum extra length of cable, looped

neatly:1. At Distribution Frames: 120 inches.2. At Outlets - Copper: 12 inches.

C. Copper Cabling:1. Category 5e and Above: Maintain cable geometry; do not untwist more than 1/2 inch from point of

termination.2. For 4-pair cables in conduit, do not exceed 25 pounds pull tension.3. Use T568B wiring configuration.

D. Identification:1. Use wire and cable markers to identify cables at each end.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.B. Comply with inspection and testing requirements of specified installation standards.C. Visual Inspection:

1. Inspect cable jackets for certification markings.2. Inspect cable terminations for color coded labels of proper type.3. Inspect outlet plates and patch panels for complete labels.

D. Testing - Copper Cabling and Associated Equipment:E. Final Testing: After all work is complete, including installation of telecommunications outlets, and

telephone dial tone service is active, test each voice jack for dial tone.END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 31 1000 - 1 SITE CLEARING

SECTION 31 1000SITE CLEARING


A. Clearing and protection of vegetation.B. Removal of existing debris.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Limitations on Contractor's use of site and premises.B. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Site fences, security, protective barriers, and

waste removal.C. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions; protection of bench

marks, survey control points, and existing construction to remain; reinstallation of removed products.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALSPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 SITE CLEARING

A. Comply with other requirements specified in Section 01 7000.B. Minimize production of dust due to clearing operations; do not use water if that will result in ice, flooding,

sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution.3.02 VEGETATION

A. Install substantial, highly visible fences at least 3 feet high to prevent inadvertent damage to vegetationto remain:1. At vegetation removal limits.

B. In areas where vegetation must be removed but no construction will occur other than pervious paving,remove vegetation with minimum disturbance of the subsoil.

C. Vegetation Removed: Do not burn, bury, landfill, or leave on site, except as indicated.1. Chip, grind, crush, or shred vegetation for mulching, composting, or other purposes; preference

should be given to on-site uses.2. Trees: Sell if marketable; if not, treat as specified for other vegetation removed; remove stumps

and roots to depth of 18 inches.3. Sod: Re-use on site if possible; otherwise sell if marketable, and if not, treat as specified for other

vegetation removed.3.03 DEBRIS

A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site.B. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work.C. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands.

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 31 2316.13 - 1 TRENCHING

SECTION 31 2316.13TRENCHING


A. Backfilling and compacting for utilities outside the building to utility main connections.1.02 REFERENCES

A. AASHTO T 180 - Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54 kg (10-lb)Rammer and a 457 mm (18 in.) Drop; 2010.

B. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using StandardEffort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2012.

C. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil UsingModified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN m/m3)); 2012.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Compaction Density Test Reports.

PART 3 EXECUTION2.01 EXAMINATION2.02 TRENCHING

A. Notify Architect of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notifiedto resume work.

B. Slope banks of excavations deeper than 4 feet to angle of repose or less until shored.C. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.D. Cut trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities.E. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter.F. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re-use from site.G. Remove excess excavated material from site.

2.03 PREPARATION FOR UTILITY PLACEMENTA. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with general fill.B. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material.C. Until ready to backfill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation.

2.04 BACKFILLINGA. Backfill to contours and elevations indicated using unfrozen materials.B. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work.C. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous, wet, frozen or

spongy subgrade surfaces.D. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density.E. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 ft, unless noted otherwise. Make gradual

grade changes. Blend slope into level areas.F. Correct areas that are over-excavated.

1. Other areas: Use general fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to minimum 97 percent ofmaximum dry density.

G. Compaction Density Unless Otherwise Specified or Indicated:H. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic.

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 31 2316.13 - 2 TRENCHING

2.05 BEDDING AND FILL AT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS2.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing.B. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in

accordance with ASTM D698 ("standard Proctor"), ASTM D1557 ("modified Proctor"), or AASHTO T180.

C. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest.D. Frequency of Tests: ________.

END OF SECTION

15063 / 15063 - Rivertop Nashville 31 3116 - 1 TERMITE CONTROL

SECTION 31 3116TERMITE CONTROL


A. Chemical soil treatment.1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Title 7, United States Code, 136 through 136y - Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and Rodenticide Act;1947 (Revised 2001).


A. Toxicant Chemical: EPA approved; synthetically color dyed to permit visual identification of treated soil.END OF SECTION

Rivertop Apartments · 2017. 11. 1. · D. Owner's Project Manager: Andrew Murray E. Nequette's...

Documents

Transcript of Rivertop Apartments · 2017. 11. 1. · D. Owner's Project Manager: Andrew Murray E. Nequette's...